Ford Automobile 2010 Fusion User Manual

Table of Contents  
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical  
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval  
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written  
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without  
notice and without incurring obligation.  
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company  
3
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
CONGRATULATIONS  
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get  
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more  
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and  
pleasure you will derive from driving it.  
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the  
following website:  
In the United States: www.ford.com  
In Canada: www.ford.ca  
In Australia: www.ford.com.au  
In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx  
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.  
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available  
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your  
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe  
options before they are generally available.  
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is  
an integral part of the vehicle.  
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an  
accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel  
supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden  
vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the  
Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION  
Warning symbols in this guide  
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In  
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments  
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be  
read and observed.  
4
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Warning symbols on your vehicle  
When you see this symbol, it is  
imperative that you consult the  
relevant section of this guide before  
touching or attempting adjustment  
of any kind.  
Protecting the environment  
We must all play our part in  
protecting the environment. Correct  
vehicle usage and the authorized  
disposal of waste, cleaning and  
lubrication materials are significant  
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this  
guide with the tree symbol.  
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning  
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and  
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to  
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and  
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known  
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm.  
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL  
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt  
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material  
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE  
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive  
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of  
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the  
moving parts a chance to break in.  
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since  
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the  
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil  
usage.  
5
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
SPECIAL NOTICES  
New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by  
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty  
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with  
your Owner’s Guide.  
Special instructions  
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic  
controls.  
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental  
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints  
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could  
result in personal injury.  
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats  
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.  
DATA RECORDING  
Service Data Recording  
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and  
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially  
includes information about the performance or status of various systems  
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake  
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford  
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may  
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received  
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing  
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC௡  
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information  
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford  
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be  
used for any purpose. See your SYNCsupplement for more information.  
6
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Event Data Recording  
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are  
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near  
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the  
investigation of such an event. The modules may record  
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially  
including information such as:  
how various systems in your vehicle were operating;  
whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were  
buckled;  
how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator  
and/or the brake pedal;  
how fast the vehicle was traveling;  
where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and  
longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS  
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.  
To access this information, special equipment must be directly  
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and  
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information  
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or  
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities  
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties  
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor  
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law  
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNCor its  
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)  
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and  
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the  
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag  
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.  
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of  
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle  
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist  
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency  
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not  
activate the feature. See your SYNCsupplement for more  
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions  
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS  
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s  
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel  
7
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic  
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want  
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate  
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to  
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel  
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and  
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNCsupplement  
for more information.  
CELL PHONE USE  
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly  
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,  
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using  
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety  
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency  
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications  
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.  
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular  
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications  
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.  
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle  
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that  
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their  
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe  
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not  
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.  
8
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE  
SPECIFIC INFORMATION  
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with  
features and options that are different from the features and options that  
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may  
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market  
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,  
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This  
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.  
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built  
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required  
information and warnings.  
9
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Safety Alert  
See Owner’s Guide  
Airbag - Front  
Fasten Safety Belt  
Airbag - Side  
Child Seat Lower  
Anchor  
Child Seat Tether  
Anchor  
Brake System  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Parking Brake System  
Brake Fluid -  
Non-Petroleum Based  
Parking Aid System  
Speed Control  
Stability Control System  
Master Lighting Switch  
Fog Lamps-Front  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
Fuse Compartment  
Windshield Wash/Wipe  
Fuel Pump Reset  
Windshield  
Rear Window  
Defrost/Demist  
Defrost/Demist  
10  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Power Window Lockout  
Interior Luggage  
Power Windows  
Front/Rear  
Child Safety Door  
Lock/Unlock  
Compartment Release  
Panic Alarm  
Engine Oil  
Engine Coolant  
Temperature  
Engine Coolant  
Do Not Open When Hot  
Battery  
Avoid Smoking, Flames,  
or Sparks  
Battery Acid  
Fan Warning  
Explosive Gas  
MAX  
MIN  
Maintain Correct Fluid  
Level  
Power Steering Fluid  
Service Engine Soon  
Engine Air Filter  
Jack  
Passenger Compartment  
Air Filter  
Low Tire Pressure  
Warning  
Check Fuel Cap  
11  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES  
Standard instrument cluster shown; metric, optional and manual  
transmission clusters similar  
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may  
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may  
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.  
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the  
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the  
respective system warning light for additional information.  
Service engine soon: The service  
engine soon indicator light  
illuminates when the ignition is first  
turned to the on position to check  
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the service engine soon  
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no  
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine  
soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for  
I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)  
testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
12  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Cluster  
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board  
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On  
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could  
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid  
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and contact your authorized dealer  
as soon as possible.  
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust  
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel  
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly  
causing a fire.  
Brake system warning light: To  
confirm the brake system warning  
light is functional, it will  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the on position  
!
P
BRAKE  
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or  
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on  
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this  
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination  
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a  
brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected  
immediately by your authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning  
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking  
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.  
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving extended  
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and  
the risk of personal injury.  
Anti-lock brake system: If the  
ABS light stays illuminated or  
ABS  
continues to flash, a malfunction has  
been detected. Contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as  
possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light  
also is illuminated.  
13  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Airbag readiness: If this light fails  
to illuminate when the ignition is  
turned to on, continues to flash or  
remains on, contact your authorized  
dealer as soon as possible. A chime will sound when there is a  
malfunction in the indicator light.  
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten  
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder௡  
chime will also sound to remind you  
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to  
the Seating and Safety Restraints  
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minderchime feature.  
Charging system: Illuminates when  
the battery is not charging properly.  
If it stays on while the engine is  
running, there may be a malfunction  
with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as  
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related  
component.  
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates  
when the oil pressure falls below the  
normal range, refer to Engine oil in  
the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter.  
AdvanceTrac/Traction control:  
Illuminates when the  
AdvanceTrac/Traction control is  
active. If the light remains on,  
contact your authorized dealer as  
soon as possible. Refer to the Driving chapter for more information.  
AdvanceTrac/Traction control  
off light: Illuminates when  
AdvanceTrac/Traction control has  
been disabled by the driver. Refer to  
the Driving chapter for more  
information.  
OFF  
14  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Overdrive cancel and grade  
assist (if equipped): Illuminates  
when the overdrive function of the  
transmission has been turned off  
and the grade assist function has  
been turned on, refer to the Driving chapter.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
Illuminates when your tire pressure  
is low. If the light remains on at  
start up or while driving, the tire  
pressure should be checked. Refer  
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When  
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three  
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on or  
begins to flash, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. For  
more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring  
system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.  
Speed control: The speed control  
system uses two different–colored  
indicator lights to indicate what  
mode the system is in:  
On (amber light): Illuminates  
when the speed control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed  
control system is engaged or turned off.  
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the speed control system is  
engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.  
Door ajar: Illuminates when the  
ignition is in the on position and any  
door or decklid is open.  
Anti-theft system: Flashes when  
the SecuriLockpassive anti-theft  
system has been activated.  
15  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Throttle Control/Transmission:  
Illuminates when a powertrain or a  
AWD fault has been detected. If the  
indicator stays on or continues to  
come on, contact your authorized  
dealer for service as soon as possible.  
Turn signal: Illuminates when the  
left or right turn signal or the  
hazard lights are turned on. If the  
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.  
High beams: Illuminates when the  
high beam headlamps are turned on.  
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the  
ignition in the off, lock or accessory position and the driver’s door is  
opened.  
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking  
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the  
driver’s door is opened.  
Parking brake on warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is  
engaged and the vehicle is driven. If the warning remains after the  
parking brake is disengaged, contact your authorized dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some messages  
appear in the message center display for the first time.  
Turn signal on warning chime: Sounds when the turn signal has been  
left on for an extended period of time.  
Perimeter alarm warning chime: Sounds when using a key to unlock  
the driver’s doors and the perimeter alarm is armed.  
16  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
GAUGES  
Standard measure cluster shown, metric similar.  
Speedometer: Indicates the  
current vehicle speed.  
Engine coolant temperature  
gauge: Indicates engine coolant  
temperature. At normal operating  
temperature, the needle will be in  
the normal range (between “H” and  
“C”). If it enters the red section,  
the engine is overheating. Stop  
the vehicle as soon as safely  
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.  
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the  
engine is running or hot.  
17  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Cluster  
Fuel gauge: Indicates  
approximately how much fuel is left  
in the fuel tank (when the ignition  
is in the on position). The fuel  
gauge may vary slightly when the  
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.  
The fuel icon and arrow indicates  
which side of the vehicle the fuel  
filler door is located.  
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter for more information.  
Tachometer: Indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute.  
Driving with your tachometer  
pointer continuously at the top of  
the scale may damage the engine.  
Odometer: Registers the total miles  
(kilometers) of the vehicle.  
Refer to Message center in this  
chapter on how to switch the  
display from Metric to English.  
Trip odometer: Registers the miles  
(kilometers) of individual journeys.  
Press and release the message  
center INFO button until “TRIP”  
appears in the display (this  
represents the trip mode). Press the  
control again to select Trip A and Trip B features. Press and hold the  
RESET button for two seconds to reset.  
18  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
MESSAGE CENTER  
With the ignition in the on position,  
the message center, located on your  
instrument cluster, displays  
important vehicle information  
through a constant monitor of  
vehicle systems. You may select  
display features on the message center for a display of status. The  
system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of  
system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.  
Selectable features  
Reset  
Press reset to select and reset  
functions shown in the INFO menu  
and SETUP menu.  
Info menu  
This control displays the following:  
Odometer  
Trip Odometer A or B  
Distance to Empty  
Average Fuel Economy  
Instantaneous Fuel Economy  
Trip Elapsed Drive Time  
Blank  
19  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Cluster  
Odometer/Trip odometer  
Refer to Gauges in this chapter.  
Distance to empty (DTE)  
Selecting this function from the  
INFO menu estimates approximately  
how far you can drive with the fuel  
remaining in your tank under  
normal driving conditions.  
Remember to turn the ignition off  
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.  
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have  
approximately 50 miles (80 km), to empty. If you reset this warning  
message, it will return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles  
(16 km) and 0 miles (0 km) miles to empty.  
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based  
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not  
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel  
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is  
disconnected.  
Average fuel economy (AFE)  
Select this function from the INFO  
menu to display your average fuel  
economy in miles/gallon or  
liters/100 km.  
If you calculate your average fuel  
economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used (liters of  
fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled), your figure may be different than  
displayed for the following reasons:  
Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up  
Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at  
service stations  
Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another  
Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)  
20  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Cluster  
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:  
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control  
system engaged to display a stabilized average.  
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.  
It is important to press RESET (press and hold RESET for two seconds  
in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to get  
accurate highway fuel economy readings.  
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the  
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
Instantaneous fuel economy (IFE)  
Select this function from the INFO  
menu to display your instantaneous  
fuel economy. This will display your  
fuel economy as a bar graph ranging  
from  
poor economy to  
excellent economy.  
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.  
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows  
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.  
, one or no bars  
Trip elapsed drive time  
Select this function from the INFO  
menu to display a timer.  
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive  
Time perform the following:  
1. Press and release RESET in order  
to start the timer.  
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.  
3. Press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the timer.  
21  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Setup menu  
Press this for the following displays:  
System Check  
Oil Life  
Units (English/Metric)  
Autolamp (if equipped)  
Autolock  
Autounlock  
Blind spot monitoring system (if  
equipped)  
Cross traffic alert system (if equipped)  
Reverse sensing system (if equipped)  
Language  
System check  
Selecting this function from the  
SETUP menu causes the message  
center to cycle through each of the  
systems being monitored.  
Pressing RESET cycles the message  
center through each of the systems being monitored.  
Some monitored systems show a message only if a warning is present.  
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:  
1. XXX% OIL LIFE  
2. All DOORS CLOSED  
3. TRUNK CLOSED  
4. BLIND SPOT SYSTEM (if equipped)  
5. CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM (if equipped)  
6. BRAKE SYSTEM  
7. FUEL LEVEL  
Oil Life XXX%  
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and  
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY  
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.  
22  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Cluster  
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change  
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the  
following:  
1. Press and release SETUP to  
display “OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD  
RESET = NEW”.  
2. Press and hold RESET for two  
seconds and release. Oil life is set to  
100% and “OIL LIFE SET TO 100%”  
is displayed.  
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)  
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.  
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press  
RESET to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press will  
reduce the value by 10%.  
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or  
12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil  
life start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 219 days.  
Units (English/Metric)  
1. Select this function from the  
SETUP menu for the current units  
to be displayed.  
2. Press RESET to change from  
English to Metric.  
Autolamp delay (if equipped)  
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the  
ignition is switched off.  
1. To disable/enable the autolamp  
delay feature, select this function  
from SETUP control the current  
display mode.  
2. Press RESET to select the new  
autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20,  
30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.  
23  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Cluster  
Autolock  
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is  
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.  
1. To disable/enable the autolock  
feature, select this function from  
SETUP for the current display  
mode.  
2. Press RESET to turn autolock on  
or off.  
Autounlock  
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s  
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.  
1. To disable/enable the autounlock  
feature, select this function from  
SETUP for the current display  
mode.  
2. Press RESET to turn autounlock  
on or off.  
Blind spot system (if equipped)  
This feature is designed to assist the driver by monitoring the side areas  
on both sides of the vehicle.  
1. Select this function from the  
SETUP menu to disable the system.  
2. Press RESET to turn blind spot  
off or on.  
Cross traffic alert system (if equipped)  
This feature is designed to assist the driver by monitoring the areas  
toward the rear of the vehicle.  
1. Select this function from the  
SETUP menu to disable/enable the  
system.  
2. Press RESET to cross traffic off  
or on.  
Rear park aid (Reverse sensing system) (if equipped)  
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near  
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.  
24  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
1. Select this function from the  
SETUP menu to disable the reverse  
sensing system feature.  
2. Press RESET to turn the rear  
park assist off. When R (Reverse)  
gear is selected, PARK AID OFF will be displayed.  
Language  
1. Select this function from the  
SETUP menu for the current  
language to be displayed.  
2. Waiting four seconds or pressing  
RESET cycles the message center  
through each of the language choices.  
Selectable languages are English, Spanish or French.  
3. Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice.  
System warnings  
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your  
vehicle’s operating systems.  
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will  
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several  
seconds.  
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no  
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of  
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the  
RESET control and clearing the warning message.  
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:  
They will not disappear until a condition is changed.  
They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset.  
They will not reappear until an ignition off/on cycle has been  
completed.  
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within  
the vehicle.  
Warnings that return after 10 minutes:  
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the park brake is  
engaged. If the warning stays on after the park brake is off, contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
25  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Cluster  
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the brake system needs  
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
Warnings that return after the ignition key is turned from off to  
on:  
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not  
completely closed.  
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger side door  
is not completely closed.  
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not  
completely closed.  
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is  
not completely closed.  
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel  
condition.  
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may  
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in  
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low  
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake  
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
CHECK PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the transmission  
is in R (Reverse) and the Reverse Sensing System (Park Aid) is disabled.  
Refer to Reverse sensing system (Park Aid) in this section to enable.  
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your  
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,  
Wheels and Loading chapter.  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or  
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as  
possible.  
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure  
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more  
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and  
Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,  
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT (if equipped) — The power  
steering system has disabled power steering assist due to a system error,  
service is required.  
26  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
SERVICE POWER STEERING (if equipped) — The power steering  
system has detected a condition that requires service.  
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW (if equipped) — The power  
steering system has detected a condition that requires service  
immediately.  
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac௡  
system has detected a condition that requires service.  
TRUNK AJAR — Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.  
REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT — Displayed when objects  
are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the  
seat, if the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life  
remaining is 10% or less.  
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches  
0%.  
BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when a  
fault with the blind spot information system has occurred. Contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when  
a fault with the cross traffic alert system has occurred. Contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed when  
blind spot information system is not available. See Blind Spot  
Information System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving  
chapter.  
CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed  
when cross traffic alert is not available. See Blind Spot Information  
System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.  
SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL (if equipped) — Displayed when  
the blind spot information system/cross traffic alert system sensors are  
blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with Cross  
Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.  
VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT (if equipped) — Displayed when  
the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert (CTA) system is  
operating and senses a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System  
(BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.  
27  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT (if equipped) — Displayed when  
the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert (CTA) system is  
operating and senses a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System  
(BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.  
TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE — Displayed when the perimeter  
alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the  
driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from  
triggering, the ignition must be turned to start before the 12 second  
chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and security  
chapter.  
CHECK AWD (if equipped) — Displayed when a problem exists with  
the AWD system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
Temporary messages:  
INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is  
made to program an invalid key or more than the maximum number of  
integrated keys allowed. For more information on integrated key, refer to  
the Locks and Security chapter.  
28  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
AUDIO SYSTEMS  
AM/FM/single CD or in-dash CD6/MP3 satellite compatible sound  
system  
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle  
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that  
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their  
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe  
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not  
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.  
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With  
this feature, the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for  
up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front  
door is opened.  
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with  
a unique audio system. If your  
display shows six small circles in the  
display, your audio system is a CD6  
system. If not, your system is a  
Single CD system.  
Setting the clock  
To set the time, press CLOCK#. The display will read SET TIME. Use the  
memory preset numbers (0–9) to enter in the desired time–hours and  
minutes. The clock will then begin from that time.  
29  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entertainment Systems  
AM/FM Radio  
/ VOL (Power/Volume): Press to turn the radio on/off. Turn the  
knob to increase/decrease volume.  
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,  
the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the  
ignition switch is turned back on.  
AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.  
TUNE: Turn the knob to go up/down the frequency band in individual  
increments.  
DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then select the desired radio frequency  
(i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).  
SEEK/TRACK: Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to access the  
previous/next strong radio station.  
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all strong radio stations.  
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): When tuned to any station, press and hold  
a preset button until sound returns and PRESET # SAVED appears in  
the display. You can save up to 30 stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and  
FM2.  
Saving presets automatically– Autoset allows you to set the strongest  
local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset  
stations for AM/FM1/FM2.  
To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO  
PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use  
SEEK/TRACK  
to  
toggle AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search  
to initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press  
another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate.  
The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing.  
If there are fewer then 10 strong stations, the system will store the last  
one in the remaining presets.  
RDS (Radio Data System) Radio  
Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search  
RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format: CLASSIC,  
COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.  
To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in the  
display. Use  
SEEK/TRACK  
to toggle RDS ON/OFF. When RDS is  
OFF, you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or view  
the station name or type.  
30  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CAT/FOLD (Category/Folder): This feature allows you to select from  
various music categories.  
To change RDS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS ON/OFF  
appears in the display. Use  
PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDS CATEGORY will appear in the  
display. Press to scroll through all possible categories. When the  
desired category appears in the display, press SEEK/TRACK to  
/
to toggle RDS to ON. Press CAT.  
/
find the next station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief  
sampling of all stations playing that category of music.  
CD/MP3 Player  
CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a disc is already loaded into the  
system, CD/MP3 play will begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded,  
NO DISC will appear in the display.  
LOAD:  
For a single CD system– This control is not operational. To load a CD,  
simply insert the disc, label side up, into the CD slot.  
For a CD6 system– Press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT  
SLOT, choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1–6. When  
the display reads LOAD CD#, load the desired disc, label side up. If you  
do not choose a slot within five seconds, the system will choose for you.  
Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.  
To auto load up to six discs– Press and hold LOAD until the display  
reads AUTOLOAD#. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system will  
prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the  
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc  
in preset #1 will begin to play.  
Press the number preset buttons (1–6) to choose the disc you want to  
play.  
EJECT:  
For a single CD system– press EJECT to eject the CD.  
For a CD6 system– press EJECT and select the desired CD slot by  
pressing the corresponding memory preset #. The display will read  
EJECTING #. When the system has ejected the CD, the display will read  
REMOVE CD #. Remove the CD. If you do not remove the CD, the  
system will reload the disc.  
To auto eject all loaded discs– Press and hold EJECT. The system will  
eject all discs and prompt you when to remove them.  
31  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
/
Play/Pause: Press to  
play/pause a track when playing a  
CD.  
SEEK/TRACK: Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to access the  
previous/next track.  
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder):  
In MP3 mode only– Press CAT/FOLD and then press  
SEEK/TRACK to access the previous/next folder.  
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or  
MP3 folder.  
DIRECT:  
In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The display will read DIRECT TRACK  
MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the  
memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that  
track.  
In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons  
(0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific  
folder.  
TEXT:  
In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album (AL), Folder  
(FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.  
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be  
displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then  
press  
COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF  
appears in the display. Use SEEK/TRACK to toggle between  
SEEK/TRACK  
to view the additional display text.  
ON/OFF. When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and  
loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.  
SHUFFLE: Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON/OFF appears in  
the display. Use  
SEEK/TRACK  
to toggle between ON/OFF. If  
you wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to begin random play. Otherwise, random play  
will begin when the current track is finished playing. The system will  
only shuffle the currently playing disc.  
32  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Satellite Radio (if equipped)  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUSradio  
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
SIRIUS: Press repeatedly to access satellite radio mode, if equipped.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.  
TUNE/OK: Turn the knob to go to the next / previous available SIRIUS௡  
satellite station.  
DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel (i.e. 002) using  
the memory preset buttons (0–9). If you only enter one digit, press OK  
and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,  
the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may  
cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station number is  
entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system  
will continue playing the current station.  
SEEK/TRACK: Press  
previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock,  
News, etc.), press SEEK/TRACK to seek to the previous/next  
SEEK/TRACK  
to seek to the  
channel in the selected category. Press and hold  
to fast seek through the previous/next channels.  
SEEK/TRACK  
SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUSsatellite  
channels. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press  
SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUSsatellite channels  
within the selected category.  
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There  
are 30 available presets, 10 each for  
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save  
satellite channels in your memory  
presets, tune to the desired channel  
then press and hold a memory preset number (0–9) until sound returns.  
TEXT: Press and release to display the artist and song title. While in  
TEXT MODE, press again to scroll through the Artist (AR), Song (SO),  
Channel (CH) and Category (CA).  
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be  
displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then  
press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to view the additional display text.  
33  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder): Press to toggle between turning  
the most recently selected satellite radio category on or off. The category  
icon (CAT) will illuminate in the display when a specific category is  
selected (the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no  
category has ever been selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.  
Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.  
Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a  
satellite radio category.  
SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press MENU when satellite radio mode is  
active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu.  
Press  
CATEGORY MENU- Press OK to enter category mode.  
Press to scroll through the list of available SIRIUSchannel  
/
to cycle through the following options:  
/
Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired  
category appears in the display. After a category is selected,  
press  
/
to search for that specific category of channels only  
(i.e. ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available  
SIRIUScategories and channels. Press OK to close and return to the  
main menu.  
SONG SEEK MENU- Press OK to enter song seek menu.  
Press  
/
to scroll through the following options:  
a. SAVE THIS SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s  
title in the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than  
a song, CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song  
is playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with  
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and  
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You  
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20  
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the  
saved titles and press  
/
to cycle through the saved titles. When  
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,  
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.  
b. DELETE A SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s  
memory. Press  
/
to cycle through the saved songs. When the  
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.  
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again  
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to  
delete the currently listed song, press  
RETURN or CANCEL.  
/
to select either  
34  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
c. DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the  
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to  
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL  
DELETED.  
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO  
SONGS.  
d. DISABLE ALERTS/ENABLE ALERTS: Press OK to  
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your  
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system  
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear  
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For  
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu  
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other  
option is to turn them off.  
CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU- Press OK to enter the Channel  
Lockout menu. Press the  
options:  
/
to scroll through the following  
a. LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL: Press OK when  
LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read  
ENTER PIN. Enter your four-digit PIN number (initial PIN is 1234)  
and the system will lock/unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED  
or UNLOCKED will be displayed.  
Note: you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to  
lock/unlock when using this feature.  
b. CHANGE PIN: Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed. The  
display will read ENTER OLD PIN. Enter your current (old) PIN  
number and when the system accepts your entry it will display  
ENTER NEW PIN. Enter your new four-digit PIN and the system will  
save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display.  
c. UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS: Press OK when UNLOCK ALL  
CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN. Enter  
your four-digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the  
display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED.  
d. RESET PIN: Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed. The display  
will read ARE YOUR SURE. Press OK again to automatically reset the  
PIN number to its initial password setting (1234). PIN RESET TO  
DEFAULT PIN will be displayed.  
e. RETURN: Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system  
will exit back to the satellite radio menu.  
35  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Sound Adjustments  
Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features:  
BASS: Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
SEEK/TRACK  
SEEK/TRACK  
to adjust the level of bass.  
to adjust the level of treble.  
to adjust the audio between  
TREBLE: Press  
BALANCE: Press  
the left (L) and right (R) speakers.  
FADE: Press SEEK/TRACK  
back (B) and front (F) speakers.  
to adjust the audio between the  
SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME: With this feature on, radio volume  
automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate  
for road and wind noise.  
The default setting is off.  
Use  
SEEK/TRACK  
to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels  
1–7: Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting)  
allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle  
speed to compensate for road and wind noise.  
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7  
is the maximum setting.  
ALL SEATS (Occupancy mode, if equipped): Press SOUND  
repeatedly to reach the Occupancy mode setting. Press  
SEEK/TRACK  
to select and optimize sound for ALL SEATS,  
DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.  
Extra Features  
AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle through LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode),  
and SYNC(if equipped).  
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to  
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.  
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, please refer to the SYNC௡  
information included with your vehicle for further information.  
OK: Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media  
features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK.  
For further information, refer to the SYNCinformation included with  
your vehicle for further information.  
36  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
(Phone): If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, press to access  
SYNC PHONE features. For further information, please refer to the  
SYNCinformation included with your vehicle for further information.  
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC, the display will read NO  
PHONE.  
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)  
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle  
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that  
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their  
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe  
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not  
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.  
Your vehicle is equipped with an  
Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The  
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way  
to connect your portable music  
player to the in-vehicle audio  
system. This allows the audio from a  
portable music player to be played  
through the vehicle speakers with  
high fidelity. To achieve optimal  
performance, please observe the  
following instructions when  
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to Auxiliary  
input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation  
system supplement.  
Required equipment:  
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones  
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)  
connectors at each end  
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:  
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.  
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully  
charged and that the device is turned off.  
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output  
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ  
in your vehicle.  
37  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entertainment Systems  
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into  
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.  
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the  
volume.  
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or  
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.  
You should hear audio from your portable music player, although it may  
be low.  
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the  
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the  
AUX and FM or CD controls.  
Troubleshooting:  
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level  
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not  
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices  
that have a headphone output with a volume control.  
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is  
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio  
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many  
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players  
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full  
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.  
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the  
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or  
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.  
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner  
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control  
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.  
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your  
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is  
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure  
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is  
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the  
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.  
USB port (if equipped)  
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle  
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that  
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their  
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe  
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not  
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.  
38  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entertainment Systems  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a  
USB port inside your center console.  
This feature allows you to plug in  
media playing devices, memory  
sticks, and also to charge devices if  
they support this feature. For  
further information on this feature,  
refer to Accessing and using your  
USB port in the SYNCsupplement  
or Navigation System supplement.  
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION  
Radio frequencies:  
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications  
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:  
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz  
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz  
Radio reception factors:  
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:  
Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the  
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,  
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.  
Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal  
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency  
is displayed.  
CD/CD player care  
Do:  
Handle discs by their edges only.  
(Never touch the playing  
surface).  
Inspect discs before playing.  
Clean only with an approved CD  
cleaner.  
39  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Wipe discs from the center out.  
Don’t:  
Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods  
of time.  
Clean using a circular motion.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in  
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical  
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact  
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.  
Do not use any irregular shaped  
CDs or discs with a scratch  
protection film attached.  
CDs with homemade paper  
(adhesive) labels should not be  
inserted into the CD player as  
the label may peel and cause the  
CD to become jammed. It is  
recommended that homemade  
CDs be identified with  
permanent felt tip marker rather  
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please  
contact your authorized dealer for further information.  
40  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Audio system warranty and service  
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio  
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or  
qualified technician.  
MP3 track and folder structure  
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure  
as follows:  
There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode  
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track  
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following  
section.  
MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The  
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file  
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.  
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less  
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio  
present.  
MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level  
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted  
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from  
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.  
Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation  
through the disc files.  
41  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Sample MP3 structure  
If you are burning your own MP3  
discs, it is important to understand  
how the system will read the  
structures you create. While various  
files may be present, (files with  
extensions other than mp3), only  
files with the .mp3 extension will be  
played. Other files will be ignored  
by the system. This enables you to  
use the same MP3 disc for a variety  
of tasks on your work computer,  
home computer and your in vehicle  
system.  
.mp3  
.mp3  
1
1
2
3
.mp3  
2
3
4
5
.mp3  
.mp3  
.mp3  
4
6
7
.mp3  
.doc  
.ppt  
.xls  
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were  
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a  
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files  
in the current folder.  
Satellite radio information (if equipped)  
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUSbroadcasts a variety of music, news,  
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For  
more information and a complete list of SIRIUSsatellite radio channels,  
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in  
Canada, or call SIRIUSat 1–888–539–7474.  
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your  
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the  
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an  
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio  
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite  
radio reception performance:  
Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the  
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other  
material as far away from the antenna as possible.  
42  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entertainment Systems  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway  
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can  
interfere with your reception.  
Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating  
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an  
audio mute.  
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is  
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO  
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.  
SIRIUSsatellite radio service: SIRIUSsatellite radio is a  
subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,  
news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order  
to receive SIRIUSservice. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory  
installed SIRIUSsatellite radio system include hardware and a limited  
subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the  
vehicle.  
For information on extended subscription terms, the online media player  
and other SIRIUSfeatures, please contact SIRIUSat 1–888–539–7474.  
Note: SIRIUSreserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add  
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular  
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford  
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming  
changes.  
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): This 12–digit  
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your  
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating  
with SIRIUS. While in satellite radio mode, you can view this number  
on the radio display by pressing the AUX and preset 1 controls  
simultaneously.  
43  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio Display  
ACQUIRING  
Condition  
Action Required  
Radio requires more No action required. This  
than two seconds to  
produce audio for the  
selected channel.  
Internal module or  
system failure  
message should  
disappear shortly.  
SAT FAULT  
If this message does not  
clear within a short  
period of time, or with  
an ignition key cycle,  
your receiver may have a  
fault. See your  
present.  
authorized dealer for  
service.  
INVALID CHNL  
Channel no longer  
available.  
This previously available  
channel is no longer  
available. Tune to  
another channel. If the  
channel was one of your  
presets, you may choose  
another channel for that  
preset button.  
UNSUBSCRIBED  
Subscription not  
available for this  
channel.  
Contact SIRIUSat  
1–888–539–7474 to  
subscribe to the channel  
or tune to another  
channel.  
NO TEXT  
NO TEXT  
Artist information not Artist information not  
available.  
available at this time on  
this channel. The system  
is working properly.  
Song title information Song title information  
not available.  
not available at this time  
on this channel. The  
system is working  
properly.  
44  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio Display  
NO TEXT  
Condition  
Action Required  
Category information Category information not  
not available.  
available at this time on  
this channel. The system  
is working properly.  
NO SIGNAL  
Loss of signal from You are in a location that  
the SIRIUSsatellite is blocking the SIRIUS௡  
or SIRIUStower to signal (i.e., tunnel, under  
the vehicle antenna.  
an overpass, dense  
foliage, etc). The system  
is working properly.  
When you move into an  
open area, the signal  
should return.  
UPDATING  
Update of channel  
programming in  
progress.  
No action required. The  
process may take up to  
three minutes.  
CALL SIRIUS௡  
1–888–539–7474  
Satellite service has  
been deactivated by  
SIRIUSsatellite  
radio.  
Call SIRIUSat  
1–888–539–7474 to  
re-activate or resolve  
subscription issues.  
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the  
Navigation System supplement for further information.  
SYNC(IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC, a hands-free communications  
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For  
more information, please refer to the SYNCsupplement or to the  
SYNCsection in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).  
45  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Climate Controls  
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
1.  
2.  
Fan speed adjustment: Turn to select fan speed.  
R
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window  
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more  
information.  
3.  
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster  
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and  
thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce  
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow  
selection.  
4.  
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister  
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will automatically  
provide outside air to reduce window fogging.  
5.  
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.  
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the  
vehicle through the vents.  
6.  
7.  
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.  
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister  
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents (if equipped).  
8. : Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear  
seat floor vents (if equipped).  
46  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Climate Controls  
9. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the  
vehicle.  
10.  
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation  
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to  
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired  
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages  
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in  
any airflow mode except  
(defrost). Recirculated air may turn off  
automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A/C. When the ignition  
switch is turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the  
recirculated air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the  
air distribution selection is either  
(panel) or  
(panel/floor).  
Recirculation may turn off automatically in some airflow modes to reduce  
fog potential.  
11. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel  
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more  
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce  
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button  
again for normal A/C operation.  
12. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with  
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages  
automatically in MAX A/C,  
(defrost) and  
(floor/defrost).  
Outside temperature (if equipped): The outside temperature will  
appear in the display and is labeled EXT TEMP.  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,  
select  
(defrost) or  
(floor/defrost).  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the  
system off or with (recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the  
airflow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather, drive with the  
windows slightly open for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the  
vehicle has been “aired out.”  
47  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for  
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in  
the MAX A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting  
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) gear position  
(automatic transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your  
A/C system.  
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:  
1. Select MAX A/C.  
2. Select the coolest temperature setting.  
3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially. As the interior starts to cool  
down, adjust the fan speed to maintain comfort.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
.
2. Select A/C.  
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
Outside temperature (if equipped): The outside temperature will  
appear in the display and is labeled EXT TEMP.  
48  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Climate Controls  
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,  
refer to Setup menu in the Message center section of the Instrument  
Cluster chapter.  
1. AUTO/Driver temperature: Press to engage full automatic  
operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control.  
The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution,  
A/C on or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle  
to reach the desired temperature. Turn to increase/decrease the  
temperature on the driver side of the vehicle. The control also adjusts  
the passenger side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged. The  
recommended initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C),  
then adjust for comfort. The driver side temperature setting will appear  
in the upper left corner of the display.  
R
2.  
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window  
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more  
information.  
3.  
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster  
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and  
thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce  
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow  
selection. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.  
4.  
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister  
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will automatically  
provide outside air to reduce window fogging. To return to full automatic  
control, press AUTO.  
5.  
system. When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering  
the vehicle through the vents. Press + or – to select the desired  
fan speed manually. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.  
6. : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. To return to  
full automatic control, press AUTO.  
7. : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister  
Power/  
: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control  
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. To return to full automatic  
control, press AUTO.  
8.  
: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear  
seat floor vents. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.  
49  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
9. PASS TEMP (passenger temperature): Press to engage/disengage  
separate passenger side temperature control. Turn to increase/decrease  
the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle. The recommended  
initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for  
comfort. The passenger side temperature setting will appear in the upper  
right corner of the display.  
10.  
Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Press to  
activate/deactivate the passenger heated seat. See Heated seats in the  
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
11.  
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation  
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to  
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired  
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages  
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in  
any airflow mode except  
(defrost). Recirculated air may turn off  
automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A/C. When the ignition  
switch is turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the  
recirculated air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the  
air distribution selection is either  
(panel) or  
(panel/floor).  
Recirculation may turn off automatically in some airflow modes to reduce  
fog potential.  
12. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel  
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more  
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce  
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button  
again for normal A/C operation.  
13. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with  
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages  
automatically in MAX A/C,  
(defrost) and  
(floor/defrost).  
14. Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Press to  
activate/deactivate the driver heated seat. See Heated seats in the  
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
50  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL  
(NAVIGATION BASED – IF EQUIPPED)  
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,  
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
1. CLIMATE: Press to control the climate control system through the  
touch display screen. See Touchscreen functions later in this section.  
R
2.  
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window  
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more  
information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and  
heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.  
3. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with  
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C  
engages automatically in MAX A/C,  
and (floor/defrost).  
(defrost)  
4. Passenger temperature: Press to activate separate passenger  
temperature control to increase/decrease the air temperature on the  
passenger side of the vehicle.  
51  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Climate Controls  
5.  
Passenger heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the  
passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety  
Restraints chapter for more information.  
6.  
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in  
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to  
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired  
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages  
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in  
any airflow mode except  
(defrost). Recirculated air may turn off  
automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C. When the ignition  
switch is turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the  
recirculated air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the  
air distribution selection is either  
(panel) or  
(floor/panel).  
Recirculation may turn off automatically in some airflow modes to reduce  
fog potential.  
7. –  
+ Fan speed control: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.  
Manual fan speed will appear in the touch screen.  
8. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. The system will  
automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution, A/C on or off,  
and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the  
desired temperature.  
9. Driver temperature: Press to increase/decrease the air temperature  
for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger  
side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.  
10.  
Driver heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver  
heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints  
chapter for more information.  
11.  
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.  
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the  
vehicle. The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off.  
12.  
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield  
defroster vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield  
of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to  
reduce window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous  
air flow selection. To return to full automatic mode, press AUTO.  
52  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS  
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,  
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
Temperature: Press the up and down arrows on the left side of the  
screen to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of  
the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature  
when dual zone operation is disengaged. Press the up and down arrows  
on the right side of the screen to increase/decrease the airflow  
temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.  
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.  
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,  
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.  
: Distributes air through the floor vents, rear seat floor vents.  
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister  
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will  
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.  
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO on the main bezel.  
Fan Speed: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.  
Dual: Press to activate/deactivate separate driver and passenger  
temperature controls.  
Max A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel  
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more  
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce  
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the Max A/C button  
again for normal A/C operation.  
VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE  
Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the  
Navigation supplement for more information on using voice commands  
with the climate control system.  
53  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather,  
select  
(defrost) or  
(floor/defrost).  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the  
system OFF or with (recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the  
airflow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open  
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”  
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for  
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in  
the MAX A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting  
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the (P) Park gear position (for  
automatic transmissions) to continue to receive cool air from your A/C  
system.  
For maximum cooling performance:  
Automatic operation:  
1. Press AUTO for full automatic operation.  
2. Do not override A/C or  
(recirculated air).  
3. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).  
Manual operation:  
1. Select MAX A/C.  
2. Select  
3. Select  
or  
.
(recirculated air) to provide colder airflow.  
4. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).  
5. Set highest fan setting initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.  
54  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
.
2. Select A/C.  
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
R
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER  
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and  
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.  
The engine must be running to operate the rear window defroster.  
R
Press  
to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light on the  
button will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster turns off  
automatically after a predetermined amount of time, if a low battery  
condition is detected or when the ignition is turned off or to the  
accessory position. To manually turn off the rear window defroster at any  
time, press the control again.  
If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,  
the same button will activate both. Refer to Exterior mirrors in the  
Driver Controls chapter.  
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside  
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside or the  
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and  
will not be covered by your warranty.  
55  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
HEADLAMP CONTROL  
Turns the lamps off.  
Turns on the parking lamps,  
instrument panel lamps, license  
plate lamps and tail lamps.  
Turns the low beam headlamps  
on.  
Autolamp control (if equipped)  
The autolamp system provides light  
sensitive automatic on-off control of  
the exterior lights normally  
controlled by the headlamp control.  
To turn autolamps on, rotate the  
control to  
.
To turn autolamps off, rotate the  
control from the autolamp  
position.  
The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined  
amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off. You can change  
the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming  
procedure that follows:  
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the  
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield  
wipers are turned on (for a fixed period of time), the exterior lamps will  
turn on with the headlamp control in the Autolamp position.  
Autolamps - Programmable exit delay  
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to  
be changed.  
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:  
1. Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in  
the autolamp position.  
2. Turn the headlamp control to off.  
3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off.  
56  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
4. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position. The headlamps  
will turn on.  
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to  
three minutes), then turn the headlamps off.  
See Message center in the Instrument Cluster section for more  
information.  
Fog lamp control (if equipped)  
With the ignition on, the fog lamps  
can be turned on when the  
headlamp control is pulled toward  
you and is in any of the following  
positions:  
Parking lamps  
Low beams  
Autolamps (when active)  
The fog lamp indicator light will  
illuminate when the fog lamps have been turned on. The fog lamps will  
not operate when the high beams are active.  
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)  
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.  
To activate:  
the ignition must be in the on position,  
the headlamp control is in the off, autolamps or parking lamp position  
and  
the transmission must be out of the P (Park) position.  
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at  
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp  
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not  
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate  
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.  
57  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
High beams  
Push the lever toward the  
instrument panel to activate. Pull  
the lever toward you to deactivate.  
F
OF  
Flash to pass  
Pull toward you slightly to activate  
and release to deactivate.  
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL  
Use to adjust the brightness of the  
instrument panel and all applicable  
lit components in the vehicle during  
headlamp and parking lamp  
operation.  
Tap the top or bottom of the  
control to brighten/dim all interior  
lit components incrementally, or  
Press and hold the top or bottom of the control until the desired  
lighting level is reached.  
Press and hold the top of the control to the full on position to activate  
the “dome on” feature. This will turn on the interior courtesy lights.  
The lights will remain on until the bottom of the control is pressed.  
58  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is  
installed, the dimmer control requires re-calibration. Press the dimmer  
control from the full dim position to the full on position to reset. This  
will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions.  
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS  
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.  
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps  
should be checked by your authorized dealer.  
Vertical aim adjustment  
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,  
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.  
(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)  
(2) Center height of lamp to  
ground  
(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)  
(4) Horizontal reference line  
2. Measure the height of the  
headlamp bulb center from the  
ground and mark an 8 foot  
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line  
on the vertical wall or screen at this  
height (a piece of masking tape works well).  
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and  
open the hood.  
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the  
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.  
4. On the wall or screen you will  
observe an area of high intensity  
light. The top of the high intensity  
area should touch the horizontal  
reference line, if not, the beam will  
need to be adjusted using the next  
step.  
59  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on  
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2  
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either  
clockwise (to adjust down) or  
counterclockwise (to adjust up).  
The horizontal edge of the brighter  
light should touch the horizontal  
reference line.  
6. Close the hood and turn off the  
lamps.  
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS  
NON-ADJUSTABLE.  
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL  
Push down to activate the left  
turn signal.  
Push up to activate the right turn  
signal.  
INTERIOR LAMPS  
Dome lamps and map lamps  
The map lamps are located on the  
overhead console. Press the controls  
to turn on the lamps.  
60  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
Your vehicle may also have reading  
lamps within the rear dome lamp(s).  
Press the switches on either side of  
the dome lamp to turn on the  
lamps.  
Ambient lighting (if equipped)  
Illuminates footwells, storage bins  
and cupholders with a choice of  
several colors. The ambient lighting  
control is located on the instrument  
panel. To activate, press and release  
the control to cycle through the  
color choices plus the off state.  
The lights come on whenever the  
ignition is in either the on or accessory position.  
Note: The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the  
off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory  
delay timer expires.  
BULB REPLACEMENT  
Lamp assembly condensation  
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.  
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air  
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that  
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal  
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the  
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during  
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry  
weather conditions.  
Examples of acceptable condensation are:  
Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)  
Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens  
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water  
leak) are:  
Water puddle inside the lamp  
61  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of  
the lens  
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of  
unacceptable moisture are present.  
Using the right bulbs  
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs  
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an  
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern  
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly  
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn  
time.  
Function  
Number of bulbs Trade number  
* Headlamp high beam  
* Headlamp low beam  
Front sidemarker lamp  
2
2
2
H7LL  
H11LL  
168  
3457NAK  
(amber)  
LED  
* Front park/turn signal lamp  
2
* Rear sidemarker lamp  
Stop/tail/turn lamp  
N/A  
2
T20  
Backup lamp  
2
921  
License plate lamp  
2
C5W  
* High-mount brake lamp  
Fog lamp (if equipped)  
Map lamp  
N/A  
2
2
LED  
H11  
12V6W  
578  
Dome/reading lamp  
6
Visor vanity lamp - Slide on Rail  
system (SOR) (if equipped)  
Puddle lamp (if equipped)  
Luggage compartment lamp  
2
37 or 14V1CP  
2
1
W5W  
578  
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.  
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.  
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.  
62  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
Replacing interior bulbs  
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.  
Replacing exterior bulbs  
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.  
Replacing headlamp bulbs (2.5L/3.0L engines)  
High beam/low beam bulb replacement  
For driver side replacement of this bulb, do the following:  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.  
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover. See  
Changing the air filter element in the Maintenance & Specifications  
section for more information.  
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.  
3. Locate the mass air flow sensor electrical connector on the air outlet  
tube. This connector will need to be unplugged.  
4. Remove the air filter assembly.  
5. Remove the rubber headlamp bulb access cover.  
High beam  
63  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights  
Low beam  
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.  
To install, reverse the removal procedure.  
For passenger side replacement of the high beam bulb, do the  
following:  
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position, then open the  
hood.  
2. Reach over the front bolster.  
3. Disengage the windshield washer bottle flexible neck strap attachment  
and move it to gain access to the bulb.  
4. Remove the rubber headlamp bulb access cover.  
5. Remove the bulb socket by  
rotating it counterclockwise, then  
pull it straight out of the lamp  
assembly.  
64  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
6. Disconnect the electrical  
connector.  
7. Carefully pull bulb straight out of  
socket and install the new one.  
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep  
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base  
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the  
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.  
8. Install the rubber bulb access cover to the housing.  
9. Re-apply pressure around the housing to make sure the protective  
cover is completely seated.  
10. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the  
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should  
not need to align it again.  
Low beam bulb replacement  
For passenger side replacement of the low beam bulb, do the  
following:  
1. Make sure headlamp control is in the off position, then open the hood.  
2. At the wheel well, remove the  
press pins from the splash shield.  
65  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
3. Reaching through the wheel well,  
remove the rubber bulb access  
cover from the housing.  
4. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise, then pull it  
straight out of the lamp assembly.  
5. Disconnect the electrical  
connector from the bulb socket and  
discard the old bulb socket.  
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep  
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base  
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the  
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.  
6. Connect the new bulb socket to the electrical connector.  
7. Install the new bulb socket into the lamp assembly by aligning the  
indexing fingers, then rotate clockwise to the locked position.  
8. Install the rubber bulb access cover to the housing.  
9. Re-apply pressure around the housing to make sure the protective  
rubber cover is completely seated.  
10. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the  
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should  
not need to align it again.  
66  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing headlamp bulbs (3.5L engine)  
High beam/low beam bulb replacement  
For driver side replacement of the high beam/low beam bulbs, do the  
following:  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the  
hood.  
2. Reach over the front bolster and remove the rubber bulb access cover  
from the headlamp housing.  
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise, then pull it  
straight out of the lamp assembly.  
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.  
For passenger side replacement of the high beam bulb, see your  
authorized dealer.  
For passenger side replacement of the low beam bulb, do the  
following:  
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left.  
2. Remove the press pins located in  
the wheel well and pull the wheel  
liner back.  
3. Reaching through the wheel well, remove the rubber headlamp bulb  
access cover.  
4. Rotate the headlamp bulb counterclockwise and remove the headlamp  
bulb  
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.  
67  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs (2.5L/3.0L engines)  
1. Make sure headlamp control is in the off position, then open the hood.  
2. Reach over the front bolster.  
3. Disengage the windshield washer bottle flexible neck strap attachment  
and move it to gain access to the bulb.  
4. Remove the bulb socket by  
rotating it counterclockwise, then  
pull it out of the lamp assembly.  
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of  
socket and push in the new one.  
6. Install new bulb socket into the  
lamp assembly by aligning the  
indexing fingers, then rotate  
clockwise to locked position.  
68  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulb (3.5L engine)  
For driver side replacement of the front parking lamp/turn signal  
bulb, do the following:  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.  
1. Release the clamps (2) that secure the air filter housing cover.  
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.  
3. Locate the mass air flow sensor electrical connector on the air outlet  
tube (1). This connector will need to be unplugged.  
4. Remove the air filter assembly.  
5. Remove the bolts on the air inlet (3), then remove the air inlet.  
6. Reach over the front bolster to access the bulb.  
7. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise, then pull it  
straight out of the lamp assembly.  
Reverse these steps to complete the process.  
69  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
For passenger side replacement of the front park/turn signal bulb, do  
the following:  
1. Turn the steering wheel left to gain access to the wheel well.  
2. Remove the press pins located in  
the wheel well and pull the splash  
shield back.  
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise, then pull it  
straight out of the lamp assembly.  
Replace with a new bulb, and reverse the removal steps to complete the  
process.  
Replacing front side marker bulbs  
1. Make sure the headlamp control  
is in the off position.  
2. From underneath the vehicle,  
partially remove the tire splash  
shield by removing the press pins.  
After removing to allow free access  
to the front side marker lamp bulb  
and electrical wire harness, the  
splash shield should be able to be  
repositioned.  
3. Rotate the lamp clockwise while holding the electrical connector in  
place. After rotating the lamp 90 degrees clockwise, pull and disengage  
the wire harness and bulb from the lamp.  
70  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
4. With the bulb exposed, carefully  
remove the bulb from the socket by  
grasping the bulb and pulling it  
away from the wire harness.  
Replace with a new bulb, and reverse the removal steps to complete the  
process.  
Replacing rear side marker lamp  
For replacement of the rear side marker lamp, see your authorized  
dealer.  
Replacing tail/brake/turn signal/backup lamp bulbs  
The tail/brake/turn signal and backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail  
lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb.  
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the  
trunk.  
2. Lift out trunk floor carpeting panel to access a luggage scuff plate  
(hard molding) shingles and a trunk side panel (dark grey, soft  
wheelhouse side trim panel) at the lamp area.  
3. Carefully pull/push the trunk side panel (dark grey, soft wheelhouse  
side trim panel) outboard to expose the lamp assembly. The most  
effective point to grasp the trunk side panel when pulling it out from the  
luggage scuff plate is at it’s bottom edge where that edge meets the  
exposed sheet metal of the trunk floor.  
Note: Do not allow the trunk side panel to remain bent and untucked  
from the luggage scuff plate (hard molding) for a long period of time.  
Doing so may result in permanent deformation.  
71  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
4. Remove the bulb socket by  
turning it counterclockwise and  
pulling it straight out.  
5. Pull the bulb from the socket and  
push in the new bulb.  
6. Install the bulb socket into the  
lamp assembly by rotating it  
clockwise.  
7. Carefully push the trunk side  
panel (dark grey, soft wheelhouse  
side trim panel) back to the shingle position to the luggage scuff plate  
(hard molding).  
8. Install trunk floor carpeting panel.  
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulb  
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is  
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, see  
your authorized dealer.  
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs  
1. Make sure the headlamp control  
is in the off position.  
2. Remove the screws from the  
license plate lamp assembly.  
3. Remove bulb socket by turning  
counterclockwise.  
4. Carefully pull the bulb out from  
the socket.  
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.  
72  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing fog lamp bulbs  
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is  
in the off position.  
2. From underneath the vehicle,  
partially remove the tire splash  
shield by removing four drive  
screws.  
After removing to allow free access  
to the front fog lamp bulb and  
electrical wire harness, the splash shield flap can be repositioned.  
3. Rotate the harness/bulb assembly  
counterclockwise to remove from  
the fog lamp.  
4. Carefully disconnect the bulb  
from the harness assembly via the  
two snap clips.  
Install the new bulb in reverse order.  
73  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER  
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end  
of the control away from you to  
increase the speed of the wipers;  
rotate towards you to decrease the  
speed of the wipers.  
Speed dependent wipers: When the wiper control is set on the  
intermittent settings, the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust  
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the  
wipers will go.  
Windshield washer: Press the end  
of the stalk:  
briefly: causes a single swipe of  
the wipers without washer fluid.  
a quick press and hold: the  
wipers will swipe three times with  
washer fluid.  
a long press and hold: the wipers  
and washer fluid will be activated  
for up to ten seconds.  
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after  
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on  
the windshield.  
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.  
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid  
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.  
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper  
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,  
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper  
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.  
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with Autolamp)  
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the  
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn  
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.  
74  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL  
To adjust the steering wheel:  
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the  
steering column.  
2. While the lever is in the down  
position, move the steering wheel  
up or down and in or out until you  
find the desired position.  
3. While holding the steering wheel  
in place, pull the lever up to its  
original position to lock the steering  
column.  
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is  
moving.  
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)  
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the  
visor mirror lamps.  
Slide on rod feature (if  
equipped)  
Rotate the visor towards the side  
window and extend it rearward for  
additional sunlight coverage.  
Note: To stow the visor back into  
the headliner, visor must be  
retracted before moving it back  
towards the windshield.  
75  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to  
your option package.  
Storage compartment  
Press on the rear edge of the  
compartment door to open.  
The storage compartment may be  
used to secure sunglasses or a  
similar object.  
ELECTRONIC COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)  
The compass heading is displayed in the Center Integrated Display  
(CID).  
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large  
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic  
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect  
compass accuracy.  
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will  
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal  
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual  
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration  
adjustment.  
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that  
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four  
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the  
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this  
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.  
76  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
Compass zone adjustment  
1. Determine which magnetic zone  
you are in for your geographic  
location by referring to the zone  
map.  
3 2  
4
1
15  
14  
13  
2. Turn ignition to the on position.  
5
12  
6
7 8 91011  
3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio  
preset buttons together for  
approximately five seconds until  
ZONE XX appears in the CID.  
4. Press and release the 7 and 9  
radio preset buttons together,  
repeatedly until ZONE XX changes  
to the correct zone (1–15) in the  
CID.  
5. The direction will display after  
the buttons are released. The zone  
is now updated.  
Compass calibration adjustment  
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures  
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical  
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all  
vehicle doors are shut.  
1. Start the vehicle.  
77  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
2. To calibrate, press and hold the 7  
and 9 radio preset buttons together  
for approximately 10 seconds until  
CAL appears. Release the buttons.  
3. Slowly drive the vehicle in a  
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])  
until the CAL display changes to the  
direction value (N, S, E, W, etc.). It  
may take up to five circles to  
complete calibration.  
4. The compass is now calibrated.  
CENTER CONSOLE  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a  
variety of console features. These  
include:  
1. Cupholders (with ambient lighting  
[if equipped]).  
2. Secondary storage bin (on hinges  
inside utility compartment).  
3. Utility compartment with power  
point, AIJ (Audio Input Jack), USB  
port (if equipped), and coin holder  
inside.  
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects  
can injure you in a collision.  
78  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE COMPARTMENT  
The storage compartment may be  
used to secure sunglasses or similar  
sized objects. Press the button to  
open the storage compartment.  
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)  
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert  
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the  
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power  
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.  
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:  
On the instrument panel  
In the center console utility compartment  
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if  
equipped).  
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)  
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point is not  
working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and relays in the  
Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and  
replacing fuses.  
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to  
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent  
the battery from being discharged:  
do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is  
not running,  
do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and  
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for  
extended periods.  
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.  
79  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
POWER WINDOWS  
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and  
do not let children play with the power windows. They may  
seriously injure themselves.  
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify  
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or  
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.  
Press and pull the window switches  
to open and close windows.  
Press down (to the first detent)  
AUTO  
and hold the switch to open.  
Pull up (to the first detent) and  
hold the switch to close.  
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are  
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This  
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately  
2–3 inches (5–8 cm).  
One-touch up or down (driver’s window only)  
This feature allows the driver’s window to open or close fully without  
holding the control down.  
To operate one-touch down:  
Press the switch completely down  
to the second detent and release  
quickly. The window will open  
fully. Momentarily press the  
switch to any position to stop the  
window operation.  
If the switch is pressed and held to  
the normal close or one-touch up position during a one-touch down  
event, the window will stop. If, after 1/2 second the switch is still held,  
the window will perform a normal close or one-touch up.  
80  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
To operate one-touch up:  
Pull the switch completely up to  
the second detent and release  
quickly. The window will close  
fully. Momentarily press the  
switch to any position to stop the  
window operation.  
If the switch is pressed and held to  
the normal open or one-touch down position during a one-touch up  
event, the window will stop. If, after 1/2 second the switch is still held,  
the window will perform a normal open or one-touch down.  
Bounce-back  
When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the  
window is moving upward, the window will automatically reverse  
direction and move down. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition  
is turned off (without accessory delay being active) during bounce-back,  
the window will move down until the bounce-back position is reached.  
Security override  
To override a bounce-back condition, within two seconds after the  
window reaches the bounce-back position, pull and hold the switch up  
and the window will travel up with no bounce-back or pinch  
protection. If the switch is released before the window is fully closed,  
the window will stop. For example, this can be used to overcome the  
resistance of ice on the window or seals.  
Window lock  
The window lock feature allows only  
the driver and front passenger to  
operate the power windows.  
To lock out all the window controls  
(except for the driver and front  
passenger) press the right side of  
the control. Press the left side to  
restore the window controls.  
Accessory delay  
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system, and moon roof  
(if equipped) may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch  
is turned off or until either front door is opened.  
81  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
INTERIOR MIRROR  
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm  
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.  
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in  
motion.  
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has  
an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change  
from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state  
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects  
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)  
to minimize glare.  
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the  
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when  
backing up.  
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior  
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror  
performance.  
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh  
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.  
Note: If equipped with a rear view camera system, a video image will be  
displayed in the mirror or the navigation system display (if equipped)  
when the vehicle is put in (R) reverse. Refer to Rearview camera  
system in the Driving chapter.  
82  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
EXTERIOR MIRRORS  
Power side view mirrors  
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in  
motion.  
To adjust your mirrors:  
1. Rotate the control clockwise to  
adjust the right mirror and rotate  
the control counterclockwise to  
adjust the left mirror.  
2. Move the control in the direction  
you wish to tilt the mirror.  
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.  
Heated mirrors (if equipped)  
Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice, mist and fog when  
the rear window defrost is activated.  
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to  
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions  
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.  
Blind spot mirrors (if equipped)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with blind spot information mirrors. See  
Blind spot information system (BLIS) with cross traffic alert (CTA)  
in the Driving section.  
SPEED CONTROL  
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping  
your foot on the accelerator pedal.  
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on  
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.  
83  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
Using speed controls  
The speed controls are located on the steering wheel. The following  
buttons work with speed control:  
– SET +: Press to set a speed or to  
increase or decrease the set speed.  
CNCL (Cancel)/RSM (Resume):  
Press to return cancel or resume a  
set speed.  
ON/OFF: Press to turn speed  
control on or off.  
The speed control system uses  
two  
indicator lights in the  
instrument cluster:  
an amber indicator light which illuminates when the system is on, and  
a green indicator light which illuminates when the system is engaged.  
Setting speed control  
To set speed control:  
4. Press and release ON.  
5. Accelerate to the desired speed.  
6. Press and release SET +.  
7. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
8. The green indicator  
light on the instrument cluster will turn on.  
Note:  
Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a  
steep hill.  
If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you  
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.  
If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below  
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.  
Disengaging speed control  
To disengage speed control, tap the brake pedal or clutch pedal (if  
equipped) or press CNCL.  
Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous set speed.  
Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,  
the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.  
84  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Resuming a set speed  
Press and release RSM. This will automatically return the vehicle to the  
previously set speed.  
Increasing speed while using speed control  
To increase the set speed:  
Press and hold SET + until you get to the desired speed, then release.  
You can also use SET + to operate the tap-up function. Press and  
release SET + to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)  
increments.  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and  
release SET +.  
Reducing speed while using speed control  
To reduce the set speed:  
Press and hold – SET until you get to the desired speed, then release.  
You can also use – SET to operate the tap-down function. Press and  
release – SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)  
increments.  
Press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped) until the  
desired vehicle speed is reached then press SET +.  
Turning off speed control  
To turn off the speed control, press OFF or turn off the ignition.  
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed  
control set speed memory is erased.  
85  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Radio control features  
VOL + (Volume): Press to increase  
the volume.  
VOL – (Volume): Press to decrease  
the volume.  
(Seek): Press to select  
the previous/next radio station  
preset, CD track or satellite radio  
channel (if equipped) depending on  
which media mode you are in.  
MEDIA: Press repeatedly to select:  
AM, FM1, FM2, or CD  
SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite radio mode if equipped).  
LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack) (if equipped)  
Navigation system hands free  
control features (if equipped)  
Press and hold  
until the voice  
control briefly  
icon appears on  
the navigation display to use the  
voice command feature.  
Press  
to complete a voice  
command.  
For further information on the  
navigation system, refer to the Navigation System supplement.  
SYNCsystem hands free  
control feature (if equipped)  
Press  
briefly to use the voice  
command feature. You will hear a  
tone and LISTENING will appear in  
the radio display. Press and  
hold  
to exit voice command.  
Press  
to activate phone mode or  
answer a phone call. Press and  
hold  
to end a call or exit phone  
mode.  
86  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
Press  
to scroll through various menus and selections. Press  
OK to confirm your selection.  
For further information on the SYNCsystem, refer to the SYNC௡  
supplement.  
Navigation system/SYNChands  
free control features (if  
equipped)  
Press  
voice  
control briefly until the  
icon appears on the  
Navigation display to use the voice  
command feature.  
Press  
to activate phone mode or  
answer a phone call. Press and  
hold  
to exit phone mode or end  
a call.  
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNCsystem, refer to  
the Navigation System and SYNCsupplements.  
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)  
You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up  
(from the closed position) to ventilate the vehicle.  
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave  
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt  
themselves.  
To open the moon roof:  
The moon roof is equipped with an  
automatic, one-touch, express  
opening, closing and venting feature.  
Press and release the rear portion of  
the control. To stop motion at any  
time during the one-touch  
operation, press the control a  
second time.  
87  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Controls  
WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that  
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are  
not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.  
To close the moon roof:  
The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express closing  
feature. Press and release the front portion of the control. To stop  
motion at any time during the one-touch closing, press the control again.  
Bounce-back:  
When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof opening as the  
moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically open and stop at a  
prescribed position. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition is  
turned off (without accessory delay being active) during bounce-back,  
the moon roof will move until the bounce-back position is reached.  
Bounce-back override:  
To override bounce-back, press and hold the front portion of the control.  
For example: Bounce-back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice  
on the moon roof or seals. If during a bounce-back condition, the control  
is released to the neutral position, then held in the one-touch position  
within two seconds after the moon roof reaches the bounce-back  
position, the moon roof will travel with no bounce-back protection.  
If the control is released before the moon roof reaches fully closed or the  
ignition is turned off (without accessory delay being active), the moon  
roof will stop. Security override can be used if the moon roof movement  
is restricted in some way, for example, if there is ice on the moon roof or  
seals.  
To vent:  
To tilt the moon roof into the vent position (when the glass panel is  
closed), press and release the front portion of the control.  
To close the moon roof from the vent position, press and hold the rear  
portion of the control until the glass panel stops moving.  
The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be opened or closed when  
the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the  
vehicle  
88  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Accessory delay:  
With accessory delay, the window switches, audio system, and moon roof  
(if equipped) may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch  
is turned off or until any door is opened.  
INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL  
Press the remote trunk release  
control on the instrument panel to  
the left of the steering wheel.  
89  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
KEYS  
Your vehicle is equipped with two  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters  
(IKTs). The key blade functions as a  
programmed key which starts the  
vehicle and unlocks/locks all the  
doors. The transmitter portion  
functions as the remote entry  
transmitter.  
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key  
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer  
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized  
dealer. Standard SecuriLockkeys without remote entry transmitter  
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if  
desired.  
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.  
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to  
the SecuriLockpassive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.  
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were  
issued with a security label that  
provides important vehicle key cut  
information. It is recommended that  
you keep the label in a safe place  
for future reference.  
90  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
POWER DOOR LOCKS  
Press the  
control to unlock all  
doors.  
Press the  
control to lock all  
doors.  
Smart locks  
This feature attempts to help prevent you from locking yourself out of  
the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition.  
When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the  
power door lock control (on the driver or passenger door trim panel), all  
the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically unlock reminding  
you that your key is still in the ignition.  
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the  
manual lock control on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, or  
using the lock control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.  
If both front doors are closed, the vehicle can be locked from any  
method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.  
Autolock feature  
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:  
all the doors are closed,  
the ignition is in the on position,  
you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and  
the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).  
The autolock feature repeats when:  
any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position  
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and  
the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).  
91  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
Deactivating/activating autolock feature  
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are four  
methods to enable/disable this feature:  
Through your authorized dealer,  
by using a power door unlock/lock sequence, or  
by using the keyless entry pad (if equipped).  
by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message  
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently  
of the autounlock feature.  
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle  
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the  
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be  
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.  
1. Place the key in the ignition and  
turn the ignition to the on position.  
2. Press the power door unlock  
control on the door panel three  
times.  
3. Turn the ignition from the on  
position to the off position.  
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.  
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time  
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.  
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then  
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was  
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was  
activated.  
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to  
confirm the procedure is complete.  
Keyless entry keypad procedure  
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 off  
position.  
2. Close all the doors.  
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry  
code.  
92  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
4. Press and hold the 3 4. While holding the 3 4 press the 7 8.  
5. Release the 7 8.  
6. Release the 3 4.  
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been  
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been  
enabled.  
Autounlock feature  
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:  
the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the  
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);  
the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the  
off or accessory position; and  
the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being  
transitioned to the off or accessory position.  
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been  
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.  
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature  
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are four  
methods to enable/disable this feature:  
Through your authorized dealer,  
by using a power door unlock/lock sequence, or  
by using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped) or  
by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message  
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated  
independently of the autolock feature.  
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle  
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the  
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be  
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.  
93  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
1. Place the key in the ignition and  
turn the ignition to the on position.  
2. Press the power door unlock  
control on the door panel three  
times.  
3. Turn the ignition from the on  
position to the off position.  
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.  
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time  
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.  
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then  
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was  
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was  
activated.  
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to  
confirm the procedure is complete.  
Keyless entry keypad procedure  
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 off  
position.  
2. Close all the doors.  
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry  
code.  
4. Press and hold the 3 4. While holding the 3 4, press and release  
the 7 8. While still holding the 3 4, press and release the 7 8 a  
second time.  
5. Release the 3 4.  
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been  
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been  
enabled.  
94  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS  
When these locks are set, the  
rear doors cannot be opened from  
the inside.  
The rear doors can be opened  
from the outside when the doors  
are unlocked.  
The childproof locks are located on  
rear edge of each rear door and  
must be set separately for each  
door. Setting the lock for one door  
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.  
Insert the key and turn to the lock position (key at an angle) to  
engage the childproof locks.  
Insert the key and turn to the unlock position (key horizontal) to  
disengage the childproof locks.  
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE  
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment  
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in  
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.  
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and  
location of the release handle.  
95  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
To open the luggage compartment  
door (lid) from within the luggage  
compartment, pull the illuminated  
“T” shaped handle and push up on  
the trunk lid. The handle is  
composed of a material that will  
glow for hours in darkness following  
brief exposure to ambient light.  
The “T” shaped handle will be  
located either on the luggage  
compartment door (lid) or inside  
the luggage compartment near the  
tail lamps.  
WARNING: Keep vehicle  
doors and luggage  
compartment locked and keep  
keys and remote transmitters out  
of a child’s reach. Unsupervised  
children could lock themselves in  
the trunk and risk injury. Children  
should be taught not to play in  
vehicles.  
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals  
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the  
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or  
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause  
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small  
children are particularly at risk.  
96  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM  
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the  
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet  
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:  
weather conditions,  
nearby radio towers,  
structures around the vehicle, or  
other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.  
The IKT allows you to:  
remotely unlock the vehicle  
doors.  
remotely lock all the vehicle  
doors.  
remotely open the trunk.  
activate the personal alarm.  
arm and disarm the perimeter  
anti-theft system.  
operate the illuminated entry  
feature.  
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position  
except while the key is held in the start position. The panic feature  
operates with the key in the off position.  
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take  
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the authorized  
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.  
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock  
1. Press  
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior  
lamps will illuminate.  
97  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
2. Press  
and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.  
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this  
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned  
to the on position.  
The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 30 minutes after the  
ignition is turned to the off position.  
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously  
pressing the  
and  
controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling  
two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The  
turn lamps will illuminate twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was  
enabled or disabled.  
Locking the doors  
1. Press  
2. Press  
and release to lock all the doors. The turn lamps will flash.  
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all  
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp  
and the turn lamps will illuminate once if all the doors and trunk are  
closed.  
Note: If any door or the trunk is not closed, or if the hood is not closed  
in vehicles equipped with the perimeter alarm feature, the horn will  
chirp twice and the lamps will not illuminate.  
Car finder  
Press  
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn  
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate  
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.  
Sounding a panic alarm  
Press  
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn lamps  
will flash for a maximum of three minutes. Press again or turn the  
ignition to the on position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time out  
in three minutes.  
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off  
position.  
Opening the trunk  
Press  
twice within three seconds to open the trunk.  
Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your  
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall  
out or block the driver’s rear view.  
98  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
Replacing the battery  
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three-volt  
lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.  
To replace the battery:  
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the  
IKT near the key ring in order to  
remove the battery cover.  
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on  
the battery terminals on the back  
surface of the circuit board.  
2. Remove the old battery.  
Note: Please refer to local  
regulations when disposing of  
transmitter batteries.  
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to  
the instructions inside the IKT for  
the correct orientation of the  
battery. Press the battery down to  
ensure that the battery is fully  
seated in the battery housing cavity.  
4. Snap the battery cover back onto  
the key.  
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become  
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after  
battery replacement.  
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)  
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters  
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional  
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your  
authorized dealer for reprogramming.  
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)  
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to  
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLockpassive anti-theft system  
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform  
this procedure yourself.  
Illuminated entry  
The interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) illuminate when the  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter is used to unlock the door(s).  
99  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:  
the ignition is turned to the on position,  
the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter lock control is pressed,  
The vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or  
after 25 seconds of illumination.  
The lights will not turn off if:  
they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or  
any door is open.  
Perimeter lamps illuminated entry  
With the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter system, the following items will  
illuminate when the  
Parking lamps  
Tail lamps  
control on the transmitter is pressed:  
Headlamps  
The lamps will automatically turn off:  
if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (on) position,  
The vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or  
after 25 seconds of illumination.  
Note: On some vehicles, the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature  
will not activate in daylight conditions.  
Deactivating/activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry  
You may enable/disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by  
your authorized dealer.  
You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to  
enable/disable the perimeter lamps feature. Note: Before starting, ensure  
the ignition is in the 1 (off) position and all vehicle doors are closed. You  
must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have  
to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a minimum  
of 30 seconds before beginning again.  
100  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
1. Place the key in the ignition and  
turn the ignition to the 3 (on)  
position.  
2. Press the power door unlock  
control on the door panel three  
times.  
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (on)  
position to the 1 (off) position.  
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.  
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (on) position. The horn will chirp one  
time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.  
6. Press the power door unlock control twice within five seconds.  
Note: The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature  
has been deactivated. The horn will chirp once and honk once (one short  
and one long) to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been  
activated.  
7. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position to exit the procedure.  
Note: The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete.  
Illuminated exit  
When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the  
ignition, the interior lamps and the puddle lamps (if equipped) will  
illuminate.  
The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and  
25 seconds elapse, or  
the key is inserted in the ignition.  
Battery saver  
The battery saver will shut off the lamps 30 minutes after the ignition  
has been turned to the 1 (off) position.  
If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the  
battery saver will shut them off 30 minutes after the ignition has been  
turned to the off position.  
If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors  
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut off them off  
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position.  
The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the  
ignition has been turned to the off position.  
101  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
You can use the keyless entry  
keypad to:  
lock or unlock the doors without  
using a key.  
open the trunk.  
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this  
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is  
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of  
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.  
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the  
controls to ensure a good activation.  
Programming a personal entry code  
To create your own personal entry code:  
1. Enter the factory set code.  
2. Within five seconds press the 1 2 on the keypad.  
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered  
within five seconds of each other.  
4. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode  
has been programmed to the module.  
Tips:  
Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.  
Do not use five numbers in sequential order.  
The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal  
code.  
Erasing personal code  
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.  
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 2 on the keypad and release.  
3. Press and hold the 1 2 for two seconds. This must be done within  
five seconds of completing Step 2.  
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code  
will work.  
Anti-scan feature  
If the wrong code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive button  
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables  
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.  
102  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:  
one minute of keypad inactivity.  
pressing the  
control on the remote entry transmitter portion of  
your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.  
the ignition is turned on.  
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry  
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your  
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each  
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking  
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding  
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Unlocking the doors/Two stage unlock  
section earlier in this chapter.  
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,  
then press the 3 4 control within five seconds.  
To open the trunk, enter the factory set code or your personal code,  
then press the 5 6 control within five seconds.  
To lock all doors, press and hold the 7 8 and the 9 0 at the same  
time (with the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the  
keypad code first.  
SECURILOCKPASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM  
SecuriLockpassive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization  
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being  
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)  
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of  
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.  
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters;  
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.  
Standard SecuriLockkeys without remote entry transmitter  
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if  
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your  
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming  
spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key.  
Note: The SecuriLockpassive anti-theft system is not compatible with  
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may  
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.  
103  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to  
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same  
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these  
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These  
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a  
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the  
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on  
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.  
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always  
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.  
Anti-theft indicator  
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.  
When the ignition is in the off  
position, the indicator will flash  
once every two seconds to  
indicate the SecuriLocksystem  
is functioning as a theft  
deterrent.  
When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for  
three seconds to indicate normal system functionality.  
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLocksystem, the indicator will flash  
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this  
occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no  
electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t  
start, try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful  
contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator  
still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, the vehicle will not start, contact  
your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.  
Automatic arming  
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off  
position.  
The theft indicator will flash every  
two seconds to act as a theft  
deterrent when the vehicle is  
armed.  
Automatic disarming  
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the on  
position.  
104  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If  
the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes  
rapidly, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
Replacement Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKT) and coded  
keys  
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead  
Transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition  
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote  
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be  
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs  
with remote entry functionality.  
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLockcoded keys are lost or stolen and  
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle  
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from  
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.  
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key  
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any  
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional  
spare or replacement keys.  
Programming spare keys  
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard  
SecuriLockcoded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program  
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter  
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded  
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be  
IKTs with remote entry functionality.  
Tips:  
Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard  
SecuriLockkeys.  
You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that  
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed  
key(s) readily accessible.  
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must  
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)  
programmed.  
105  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
Please read and understand the  
entire procedure before you begin.  
1. Insert the first previously  
programmed coded key into the  
ignition.  
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off)  
position to the 3 (on) position. Keep  
the ignition in the 3 (on) position  
for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.  
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the first coded  
key from the ignition.  
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to  
the 1 (off) position, insert the second previously coded key into the  
ignition.  
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep  
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least three seconds, but no more  
than 10 seconds.  
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the second  
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.  
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to  
the 1 (off) position and removing the previously programmed coded  
key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the  
ignition.  
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep  
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least six seconds.  
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.  
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s  
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate  
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.  
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your  
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The  
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may  
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your  
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.  
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait 20 seconds and  
then repeat this procedure from Step 1.  
106  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM  
The perimeter anti-theft system will help protect your vehicle from  
unauthorized entry.  
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,  
ensure ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters are brought to the  
authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.  
Arming the system  
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is  
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the  
turn signal lamps and will sound the horn.  
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is in the 1 (off) position,  
or is removed from the ignition. Either of the following actions will  
prearm the alarm system:  
Press the  
control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your  
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.  
When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on the  
remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT, the horn will chirp once to  
let you know that all doors, the hood and the trunk are closed. If any of  
these are not closed, the horn will chirp twice to warn you that a door,  
the hood or the trunk is still open.  
Press the driver or passenger  
interior door lock control while  
the door is open, then close the  
door.  
Press the 7 8 and the 9 0  
controls on the keyless entry  
keypad (if equipped) at the same  
time to lock the doors (driver’s  
door must be closed).  
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur  
before the vehicle becomes armed.  
Each door, the hood or the trunk is armed individually, and if any are  
open, they must be closed for the system to enter the 20 second  
countdown.  
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the  
trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the  
20 second countdown.  
107  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locks and Security  
Disarming the system  
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:  
Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of  
your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.  
Unlocking the doors using the keyless entry keypad (if equipped).  
Turn ignition to the on position with a valid SecuriLock™ key.  
Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of  
your IKT. This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the  
alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still be armed.  
If using a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle, a chime will  
sound and the message center will display TO STOP ALARM START  
VEHICLE when you open the door and you will have 12 seconds to  
disarm the alarm system using any of the actions above, otherwise the  
alarm will trigger.  
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed  
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.  
Triggering the anti-theft system  
The armed system will be triggered if:  
Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the door key  
or the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT.  
The ignition is turned to the 3 (on) position with an invalid  
SecuriLockkey.  
108  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SEATING  
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to  
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal  
injuries in the event of a collision.  
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to  
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.  
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original  
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped  
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original  
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An  
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or  
collision.  
Adjustable head restraints  
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are  
vertically adjustable.  
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a  
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in  
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its  
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint  
while the vehicle is in motion.  
The adjustable head restraints  
consist of:  
a trimmed energy absorbing foam  
and structure (1),  
two steel stems (2),  
a guide sleeve adjust/release  
button (3),  
and a guide sleeve unlock/remove  
button (4).  
109  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:  
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.  
2. Raise the head restraint by  
pulling up on the head restraint.  
3. Lower the head restraint by  
pressing and holding the guide  
sleeve adjust/release button and  
pushing down on the head restraint.  
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is  
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the  
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the  
head restraint to its full up position.  
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.  
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted  
when the seat is occupied.  
110  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:  
1. Pull up the head restraint until it  
reaches the highest adjustment  
position.  
2. Simultaneously press and hold  
both the adjust/release button and  
the unlock/remove button, then pull  
up on the head restraint.  
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:  
1. Insert the two stems into the  
guide sleeve collars.  
2. Push the head restraint down  
until it locks.  
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is  
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the  
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the  
head restraint to its full up position.  
111  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a  
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.  
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)  
The lumbar control is located on the  
side of the seat cushion.  
Turn to adjust lumbar support.  
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)  
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the  
vehicle is moving.  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.  
Lift handle to move seat forward or  
backward.  
112  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pump the handle upwards to raise  
the cushion and pump downward to  
lower the cushion to the desired  
location.  
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.  
Folding down the front passenger seatback (if equipped)  
The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to  
make room for a long load. To fold the seatback:  
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.  
2. Push the head restraint release button and move the head restraint  
fully down.  
3. Pull up on the recliner handle located on the outboard side of the  
seat.  
4. Without releasing the handle, push the back of the seat forward until  
flat.  
5. Move the seat as far forward as possible.  
WARNING: Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent  
injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting  
during sudden stops.  
113  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original  
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped  
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original  
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An  
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or  
collision.  
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)  
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the  
vehicle is moving.  
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to  
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.  
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to  
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal  
injuries in the event of a collision.  
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat  
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion  
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting  
in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your  
seatback, with your feet on the floor.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not  
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map  
pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do  
not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the  
seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag  
off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer  
to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental  
restraint system (SRS) section for additional details. Failure to follow  
these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing  
system.  
114  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.  
Move the control in the direction of  
the arrows to raise or lower the  
front portion of the seat cushion.  
Move the control in the direction of  
the arrows to raise or lower the rear  
portion of the seat cushion.  
Press the control in the direction of  
the arrows to move the seat  
forward, backward, up or down.  
Power recline (if equipped)  
Press the control to recline the  
seatback forward or rearward.  
115  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Heated seats (if equipped)  
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin  
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord  
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical  
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat  
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used  
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that  
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may  
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,  
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating  
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated  
seat may cause serious personal injury.  
Note: Do not do the following:  
Place heavy objects on the seat  
Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the  
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.  
The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in the on  
position.  
To operate the heated seats:  
DATC systems  
Press the control located on the  
climate control system panel once  
to activate high heat.  
Press twice to activate low heat.  
Press a third time to deactivate.  
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. For low  
heat, one light will be lit; for high heat, both lights will be lit.  
Navigation based systems  
Press the control located on the  
climate control system panel once  
to activate high heat.  
Press twice to activate low heat.  
Press a third time to deactivate.  
116  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
REAR SEATS  
Second-row adjustable head restraints  
Your vehicle is equipped with second-row outboard and center head  
restraints that are vertically adjustable.  
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a  
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in  
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its  
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint  
while the vehicle is in motion.  
The adjustable head restraints  
consist of:  
a trimmed energy absorbing foam  
2
and structure (1),  
two steel stems (2),  
4
a guide sleeve adjust/release  
button (3),  
and a guide sleeve with a pin hole  
for removing the head restraint  
(4).  
1
2
3
117  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:  
1. Raise the head restraint by  
pulling up on the head restraint.  
2. Lower the head restraint by  
pressing and holding the guide  
sleeve adjust/release button and  
pushing down on the head restraint.  
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is  
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the  
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the  
head restraint to its full up position.  
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.  
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted  
when the seat is occupied.  
118  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:  
1. Pull up the head restraint until it  
reaches the highest adjustment  
position.  
2. Insert and push a tool, such as a  
large paper clip, into the pin hole  
located on the side of the guide  
sleeve and press the adjust/release  
button, then pull the head restraint  
upward.  
3. Store the head restraint in a  
secure location, such as the trunk of  
the vehicle.  
119  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:  
1. Insert the two stems into the  
guide sleeve collars.  
2. Push the head restraint down  
until it locks.  
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is  
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the  
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the  
head restraint to its full up position.  
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a  
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.  
Split-folding rear seatbacks  
One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional  
cargo space.  
120  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To lower the seatback(s), pull the  
release handle(s) located inside the  
trunk.  
Fold the seatback(s) down.  
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original  
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped  
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original  
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An  
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or  
collision.  
Make sure that the safety belt for the rear center passenger is properly  
routed over the rear seatback.  
121  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Seat-mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment  
To access the cup holders, fold the  
armrest down.  
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects  
can injure you in a collision.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS  
Personal Safety System™  
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of  
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help  
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to  
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating  
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of  
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.  
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:  
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.  
Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management  
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.  
Driver’s seat position sensor.  
Front passenger sensing system  
“Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp  
Front crash severity sensor.  
Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.  
Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.  
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt  
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position  
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.  
122  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?  
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your  
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant  
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides  
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the  
RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both  
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash  
severity and occupant conditions.  
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front  
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with  
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined  
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not  
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed  
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side  
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient  
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in  
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in side collisions.  
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints  
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag  
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more  
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for  
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints  
(SRS) section in this chapter.  
Front crash severity sensor  
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the  
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable  
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This  
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different  
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the  
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.  
Driver’s seat position sensor  
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to  
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat  
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting  
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.  
123  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Front passenger sensing system  
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this  
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close  
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs  
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other  
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by  
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash  
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary  
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident  
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained  
in the rear seating positions than in the front.  
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air  
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move  
the seat all the way back.  
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under  
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.  
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front  
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is  
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag  
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger  
seat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage  
recommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY  
encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The  
sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger  
seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty and the  
safety belt is unbuckled, or when a child or a small person occupies the  
front passenger seat and the safety belt is unbuckled.  
Front safety belt usage sensors  
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and  
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information  
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment  
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.  
124  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Front safety belt pretensioners  
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are  
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body  
during frontal collisions and in side collisions when the side curtains and  
side airbags are activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the  
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be  
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with  
the front airbags.  
Front safety belt energy management retractors  
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow  
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled  
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps  
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by  
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management  
feature- front outboard section in this chapter.  
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational  
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument  
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer  
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not  
required.  
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits  
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),  
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat  
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the  
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.  
The warning light will either flash or stay lit.  
The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal  
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless  
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a  
collision.  
125  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Safety belt precautions  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit  
where they can be properly restrained.  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,  
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air  
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.  
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in  
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not  
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped  
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a  
seat and using a safety belt properly.  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.  
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific  
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one  
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt  
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the  
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside  
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.  
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under  
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.  
126  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant  
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an  
accident.  
Combination lap and shoulder belts  
1. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle closest to  
the direction the tongue is coming  
from) until you hear a snap and feel  
it latch. Make sure the tongue is  
securely fastened in the buckle.  
2. To unfasten, press the release  
button and remove the tongue from  
the buckle.  
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.  
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder  
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or  
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety  
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.  
Energy management feature — front outboard  
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management  
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in  
the event of a head-on collision.  
The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is  
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.  
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.  
127  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt  
and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk  
of injury in a collision.  
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder  
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two  
types of locking modes described below:  
Vehicle sensitive mode  
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length  
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle  
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner  
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph  
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce  
forward movement of the driver and passengers.  
Automatic locking mode  
When to use the automatic locking mode  
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will  
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic  
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.  
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a  
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children  
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating  
position whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or  
Safety seats for children later in this chapter.  
How to use the automatic locking mode  
Buckle the combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
128  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Grasp the shoulder portion and  
pull downward until the entire  
belt is pulled out.  
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking  
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking  
mode.  
How to disengage the automatic locking mode  
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all  
passenger safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should  
be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that  
the Љautomatic locking retractorЉ feature for child seats is still working  
properly. Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized  
dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is  
noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could  
increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract  
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the  
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.  
Safety belt height adjustment  
Your vehicle has safety belt height  
adjustments at the front outboard  
seating positions. Adjust the height  
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests  
across the middle of your shoulder.  
To adjust the shoulder belt height,  
pull on the center button and slide  
the height adjuster up or down.  
Release the button and pull down  
on the height adjuster to make sure  
it is locked in place.  
129  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the  
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust  
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety  
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
Safety belt pretensioner  
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and  
front outboard passenger seating positions.  
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the  
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.  
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system  
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be  
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in  
deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and side air  
curtains, and safety belt pretensioners.  
Safety belt extension assembly  
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch  
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number  
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.  
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety  
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on  
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too  
short for you when fully extended.  
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the  
shoulder belt across the torso.  
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime  
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a  
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.  
130  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Conditions of operation  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s safety belt is not  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the on  
position...  
The safety belt warning light  
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the  
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled while the indicator  
light is illuminated and the  
warning chime is sounding...  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the on  
position...  
The safety belt warning light and  
warning chime turn off.  
The safety belt warning light and  
indicator chime remain off.  
Belt-Minderா  
The Belt-Minderfeature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt  
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by  
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning  
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s  
safety belt is unbuckled.  
The Belt-Minderfeature uses information from the front passenger  
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and  
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the  
Belt-Minderfeature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,  
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined  
by the front passenger sensing system.  
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and  
either may activate the Belt-Minderfeature. The warnings are the same  
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minderwarnings have  
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant  
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the  
Belt-Minderfeature.  
When the Belt-Minderfeature is activated, the safety belt warning light  
illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every  
30 seconds, repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety  
belts are buckled.  
131  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The Belt-Minderfeature uses two different warning chimes. During the  
first minute of activation, the warning chime will sound once every  
second. The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second  
while the system is activated.  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s and front  
passenger’s safety belts are  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the on  
position or less than  
The Belt-Minderfeature will not  
activate.  
1-2 minutes have elapsed since  
the ignition switch has been  
turned on...  
The driver’s or front  
The Belt-Minderfeature is activated  
- the safety belt warning light  
illuminates and the warning chime  
sounds for six seconds every  
passenger’s safety belt is not  
buckled when the vehicle has  
reached at least 3 mph  
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have 30 seconds, repeating for  
elapsed since the ignition  
approximately five minutes or until  
switch has been turned to on... the safety belts are buckled.  
The driver’s or front  
The Belt-Minderfeature is activated  
passenger’s safety belt becomes - the safety belt warning light  
unbuckled for approximately  
1 minute while the vehicle is  
traveling at least 3 mph  
illuminates and the warning chime  
sounds for six seconds every  
30 seconds, repeating for  
(5 km/h) and more than  
approximately five minutes or until  
1-2 minutes have elapsed since the safety belts are buckled.  
the ignition switch has been  
turned to on...  
132  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts  
(All statistics based on U.S. data):  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
“Crashes are rare events”  
36700 crashes occur every day. The  
more we drive, the more we are  
exposed to “rare” events, even for  
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be  
seriously injured in a crash during  
our lifetime.  
“I’m not going far”  
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25  
miles (40 km) of home.  
“Belts are uncomfortable”  
We design our safety belts to enhance  
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -  
try different positions for the safety  
belt upper anchorage and seatback  
which should be as upright as  
possible; this can improve comfort.  
Prime time for an accident.  
Belt-Minderreminds us to take a few  
seconds to buckle up.  
“I was in a hurry”  
“Safety belts don’t work”  
Safety belts, when used properly,  
reduce risk of death to front seat  
occupants by 45% in cars, and by  
60% in light trucks.  
“Traffic is light”  
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in  
single-vehicle crashes, many when  
no other vehicles are around.  
Possibly, but a serious crash can do  
much more than wrinkle your clothes,  
particularly if you are unbelted.  
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4  
times more often in vehicles with  
TWO or MORE people. Children and  
younger brothers/sisters imitate  
behavior they see.  
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”  
“The people I’m with don’t  
wear belts”  
133  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
“I have an airbag”  
Airbags offer greater protection when  
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags  
are not designed to inflate in rear and  
side crashes or rollovers.  
“I’d rather be thrown clear”  
Not a good idea. People who are  
ejected are 40 times more likely  
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent  
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR  
CRASH”.  
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a  
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minderchime. To  
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag  
system.  
One-time disable  
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles  
the safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minderis disabled for  
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minderfeature will enable during  
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for  
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one-time  
disable.  
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderfeature  
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderare  
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating  
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will  
terminate the process.  
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the  
deactivation/activation programming procedure.  
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderfeatures must be  
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the  
same key cycle.  
134  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minderfeatures can be  
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:  
Before following the procedure, make sure that:  
The parking brake is set.  
The gearshift is in P (Park).  
The ignition is off.  
The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled.  
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your  
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of  
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you  
leave the Belt-Mindersystem activated for yourself and others who  
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not  
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minderfeature while driving the vehicle.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE  
ENGINE.  
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately  
1–2 minutes).  
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt  
warning light turns off.  
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the  
safety belt nine times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled  
state.  
After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three  
seconds.  
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle  
then unbuckle the safety belt.  
This will disable the Belt-Minderfeature for that seating position if it  
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will  
flash four times per second for three seconds.  
This will enable the Belt-Minderfeature for that seating position if it  
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will  
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three  
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning  
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.  
135  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)  
The passenger airbag cover is a seamless design so that you cannot see  
the boundary around its door. The shaded area in the illustration  
represents the passenger airbag cover.  
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag cover.  
Placing objects on or over the airbag cover may cause those  
objects to be thrown by the airbag into your face and torso or may  
result in a failure of the airbag to inflate properly, both of which could  
result in serious injury.  
Important supplemental restraint system precautions  
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or  
gently and the risk of injury from a  
deploying airbag is greatest close to  
the trim covering the airbag module.  
136  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,  
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air  
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.  
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under  
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.  
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches  
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.  
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a  
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other  
injuries.  
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:  
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the  
pedals comfortably.  
Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright  
position.  
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.  
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause  
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso  
causing serious injury.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the  
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your  
authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of  
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure  
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,  
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the  
vehicle.  
137  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and airbags  
Children must always be properly  
restrained. Accident statistics  
suggest that children are safer when  
properly restrained in the rear  
seating positions than in the front  
seating position. Failure to follow  
these instructions may increase the  
risk of injury in a collision.  
WARNING: Airbags can kill  
or injure a child in a child  
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing  
child seat in front of an active  
airbag. If you must use a  
forward-facing child seat in the  
front seat, move the seat all the  
way back.  
How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental  
restraint system work?  
The safety belt pretensioner and  
airbag SRS are designed to activate  
when the vehicle sustains  
longitudinal deceleration sufficient  
to cause the sensors to close an  
electrical circuit that initiates  
pretensioner activation and airbag  
inflation.  
The fact that the pretensioners and  
airbags did not activate in a collision  
does not mean that something is  
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type  
sufficient to cause activation. Front airbags are designed to activate in  
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or  
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal  
deceleration.  
138  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The airbags inflate and deflate  
rapidly upon activation. After airbag  
deployment, it is normal to notice a  
smoke-like, powdery residue or  
smell the burnt propellant. This may  
consist of cornstarch, talcum  
powder (to lubricate the bag) or  
sodium compounds (e.g., baking  
soda) that result from the  
combustion process that inflates the  
airbag. Small amounts of sodium  
hydroxide may be present which  
may irritate the skin and eyes, but  
none of the residue is toxic.  
While the system is designed to help  
reduce serious injuries, contact with  
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary  
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable  
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,  
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who  
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time  
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be  
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while  
maintaining vehicle control.  
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after  
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.  
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not  
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air  
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury  
in a collision.  
The SRS consists of:  
driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and  
airbags)  
seat-mounted side airbags. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag system  
later in this chapter  
safety belt pretensioners  
one or more impact and safing sensors  
139  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
a readiness light and tone  
and the electrical wiring which connects the components  
Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Side curtain airbag system later  
in this chapter.  
Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing  
system later in this chapter.  
“Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to  
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.  
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the  
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact  
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag  
back up power, the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.  
Front passenger sensing system  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory  
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208  
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal  
airbag under certain conditions.  
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of  
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to  
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the  
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or  
disabled (will not inflate).  
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the  
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:  
the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in  
the front seat.  
the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant  
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.  
the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing  
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.  
a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of  
time.  
When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger side  
airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.  
140  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The front passenger sensing system  
uses a Љpassenger airbag offЉ or  
Љpass airbag offЉ indicator which will  
illuminate and stay lit to remind you  
that the front passenger frontal  
airbag is disabled. The indicator  
lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel above the  
radio.  
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when  
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.  
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the  
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the  
indicator lamp will be unlit.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not  
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant  
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.  
When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)  
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate  
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is  
disabled.  
If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not  
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the  
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)  
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a  
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.  
When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger  
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay  
unlit.  
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the  
Љpassenger airbag offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator lamp is lit, it is  
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:  
Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the  
full upright position.  
Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,  
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.  
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for  
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person  
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.  
141  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be  
advised to ride in the rear seat.  
Pass Airbag Off  
Indicator Lamp  
Occupant  
Passenger Airbag  
Empty seat  
Small child in child  
safety seat or booster  
Unlit  
Lit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Small child with safety Lit  
belt buckled or  
unbuckled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Adult  
Unlit  
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children  
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating  
position.  
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s  
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated  
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the  
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting  
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For  
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,  
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of  
injury during a crash is greatly increased.  
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat  
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion  
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting  
in serious injury or death in a crash.  
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.  
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects  
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front  
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the  
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ lamp may or may not  
be illuminated according to the table below.  
142  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pass Airbag Off  
Passenger Airbag  
Indicator Lamp  
Objects  
Small (i.e. three-ring  
binder, small purse,  
bottled water)  
Medium (i.e. heavy  
briefcase, fully packed  
luggage)  
Empty seat, or small  
to medium object with  
safety belt buckled  
Unlit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Lit  
Lit  
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is  
incorrect, check for the following:  
Objects lodged underneath the seat  
Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if  
equipped)  
Objects hanging off the seat back  
Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)  
Objects placed on the occupant’s lap  
Cargo interference with the seat  
Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat  
Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat  
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated  
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing  
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or  
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:  
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or  
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.  
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between  
the seat and the center console (if equipped).  
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for  
proper airbag status.  
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front  
passenger seat sensing system.  
143  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
In case there is a problem with the  
front passenger sensing system, the  
airbag readiness light in the  
instrument cluster will stay lit.  
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:  
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that  
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering  
with the seat.  
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take  
the following steps to remove the obstruction:  
Pull the vehicle over.  
Turn the vehicle off.  
Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged  
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.  
Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).  
Restart the vehicle.  
Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is  
no longer illuminated  
If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated, this may or may/not  
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.  
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle  
immediately to an authorized dealer.  
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to  
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer  
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer  
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.  
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger  
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing  
system.  
Determining if the system is operational  
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the  
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the  
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the  
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not  
required.  
144  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
The readiness light (same light  
for front and side airbag system)  
will either flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not  
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental  
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless  
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a  
collision.  
Seat-mounted side airbag system  
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or  
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front  
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a  
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the  
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.  
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of  
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side  
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.  
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag  
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the  
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an  
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear  
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.  
145  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How does the side airbag system work?  
The design and development of the side airbag system included  
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of  
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working  
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of  
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including side air  
curtain systems).  
The side airbag system consists of  
the following:  
An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)  
with a gas generator concealed  
behind the outboard bolster of  
the driver and front passenger  
seatbacks.  
The same warning light,  
electronic control and diagnostic  
unit as used for the front airbags.  
Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,  
attached near the floor.  
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of  
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.  
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the  
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by  
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between  
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided  
occupants in side impact collisions.  
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral  
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit  
that initiates airbag inflation.  
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that  
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were  
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed  
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or  
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral  
deceleration.  
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after  
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.  
146  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: If the side  
airbag has deployed, the  
airbag will not function again.  
The side airbag system  
(including the seat) must be  
inspected and serviced by an  
authorized dealer. If the airbag  
is not replaced, the unrepaired  
area will increase the risk of injury  
in a collision.  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness  
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the  
airbag is not required.  
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the  
following:  
The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will  
either flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned to the on position.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not  
function properly in the event of a collision.  
Side-curtain airbag system  
147  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or  
near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact  
with a deploying side air curtain. Failure to follow these instructions  
may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.  
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or  
near the side air curtain cover.  
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag  
could injure you as it deploys from the seat.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the side  
air curtain system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the  
headliner on a vehicle containing a side air curtain. See your  
authorized dealer.  
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,  
should always wear their safety belts even when an inflatable  
curtain is provided.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or  
place objects in the deployment zone of the inflatable curtain.  
148  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How does the side air curtain system work?  
The design and development of the  
side air curtain system included  
recommended testing procedures  
that were developed by a group of  
automotive safety experts known as  
the Side Airbag Technical Working  
Group. These recommended testing  
procedures help reduce the risk of  
injuries related to the deployment of  
side airbags (including side air  
curtain systems).  
The side air curtain system consists  
of the following:  
An inflatable nylon curtain with a  
gas generator concealed behind  
the headliner and above the  
doors.  
The headliner will flex to open  
above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment.  
The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used  
for the front airbags.  
Two crash sensors located under the outboard side of the front seats,  
attached near the floor.  
Two crash sensors located at the base of the “C” pillars above the  
wheel house.  
Side air curtains and side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can  
help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side  
impact collision.  
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in  
the rear seats. The side air curtain will not interfere with children  
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is  
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along  
the side window openings.  
149  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The side air curtains are mounted to the sheet metal above the first and  
second row seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air curtain and  
seat-mounted side airbag on the side affected by the collision will be  
inflated, except that the passenger sensing system will deactivate the  
passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty unbuckled  
passenger seat or an unbuckled child or small person in the passenger  
seat. The air curtain was designed to inflate between the side window  
area and occupant to further enhance the protection provided to  
occupants in side impact collisions. The seat-mounted side airbag was  
designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further  
enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions.  
The side air curtain system SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle  
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an  
electrical circuit that initiates air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag  
inflation.  
The fact that the side air curtain and seat-mounted side airbag did not  
inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the  
system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to  
cause activation. The side air curtain system is designed to inflate in side  
impact collisions, not roll-over, rear impact, frontal or near-frontal  
collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.  
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after  
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.  
WARNING: If the side air  
curtain has deployed, the  
air curtain will not function  
again. The side air curtain  
system (including the A, B and  
C pillar trim and headliner)  
must be inspected and serviced  
by an authorized dealer. If the  
air curtain is not replaced, the  
unrepaired area will increase the  
risk of injury in a collision.  
150  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness  
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the  
airbag is not required.  
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the  
following:  
The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will  
either flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned to the on position.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not  
function properly in the event of a collision.  
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™  
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the  
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact  
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or  
the safety belt pretensioners.  
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are  
taken by the driver or any other person:  
pressing the hazard control button,  
or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.  
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.  
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles  
(including pretensioners)  
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE  
disposed of by qualified personnel.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN  
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety  
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.  
151  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Important child restraint precautions  
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in  
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.  
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.  
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an  
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.  
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The  
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable  
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety  
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford  
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety  
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your  
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and  
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station  
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the  
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local  
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further  
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your  
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport  
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly  
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,  
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to  
your child.  
152  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children  
Recommended  
Child size, height, weight, or age  
restraint type  
Infants Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or  
Use a child safety seat  
or  
less (generally age four or younger) (sometimes called an  
toddlers  
infant carrier,  
convertible seat, or  
toddler seat).  
Small  
Children who have outgrown or no  
Use a belt-positioning  
booster seat.  
children longer properly fit in a child safety  
seat (generally children who are less  
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)  
tall, are greater than age four (4)  
and less than age twelve (12), and  
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb  
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb  
(45 kg) if recommended by your  
child restraint manufacturer)  
Larger Children who have outgrown or no  
children longer properly fit in a  
belt-positioning booster seat  
Use a vehicle safety  
belt having the lap belt  
snug and low across  
the hips, shoulder belt  
(generally children who are at least  
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or centered across the  
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb shoulder and chest,  
(45 kg) if recommended by child  
restraint manufacturer)  
and seatback upright.  
You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and  
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.  
Many states and provinces require that small children use approved  
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in  
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or  
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of  
children in your vehicle.  
When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of  
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident  
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in  
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.  
153  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children  
Use any attachment method as indicated  
below by “X”  
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety  
Safety  
(lower (lower  
belt  
belt and belt  
Restraint Child  
anchors anchors and  
LATCH  
(lower  
only  
Type  
Weight  
and  
only)  
top  
top  
tether anchors  
anchor and top  
tether  
tether  
anchor)  
anchor)  
Rear  
Up to  
48 lb  
facing  
X
X
child seat (21 kg)  
Forward Up to  
facing  
child seat (21 kg)  
Forward Over  
facing  
child seat (21 kg)  
48 lb  
X
X
X
X
X
48 lb  
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.  
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the  
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and  
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all  
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating  
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.  
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and  
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to  
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,  
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in  
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle  
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is  
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not  
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.  
154  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or  
death.  
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.  
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or  
death in a collision.  
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster  
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or  
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.  
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder  
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces  
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk  
of injury or death in a collision.  
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets  
unattended in your vehicle.  
Transporting children  
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is  
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped  
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are  
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and  
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in  
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA  
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your  
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and  
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and  
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet  
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John  
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,  
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John  
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at  
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).  
155  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult  
passengers in your vehicle.  
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your  
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be  
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or  
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and  
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of  
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child  
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety  
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.  
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN  
Infant and/or toddler seats  
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the  
child.  
When installing a child safety seat:  
Review and follow the information  
presented in the Airbag  
supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) section in this chapter.  
Carefully follow all of the  
manufacturer’s instructions  
included with the safety seat you  
put in your vehicle. If you do not  
install and use the safety seat  
properly, the child may be injured  
in a sudden stop or collision.  
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a  
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a  
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the  
way back.  
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating  
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and  
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the  
largest child in the front seat.  
156  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder  
belts  
If needed, when installing some high back child restraints, the head  
restraints of the second row seating positions can be removed.  
To remove the head restraint, insert  
and push a tool, such as a large  
paper clip, into the pin hole located  
on the side of the guide sleeve and  
press the lock/release button, then  
pull the head restraint upward.  
157  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To reinstall the head restraint, line  
the posts up in the holes on the seat  
back with the head restraint strap  
facing the outside of the vehicle and  
push down until the head restraint  
locks into place. Lift gently to  
ensure it is locked into place.  
Refer to Rear adjustable head restraints earlier in this chapter for  
more information.  
WARNING: If the head restraint has been removed from a  
seating position to accommodate a high back child restraint, the  
head restraint must be re-installed prior to use of the seat by any other  
occupant in order to reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of  
a collision.  
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.  
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating  
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and  
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the  
largest child in the front seat.  
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:  
Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.  
Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap  
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the  
buckle.  
158  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety  
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,  
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.  
Place vehicle seat back in upright position.  
Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5  
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.  
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,  
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block  
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower  
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of  
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able  
to be properly restrained.  
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with  
combination lap/shoulder belts:  
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,  
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.  
1. Position the child safety seat in a  
seat with a combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
159  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt  
and then grasp the shoulder belt  
and lap belt together.  
3. While holding the shoulder and  
lap belt portions together, route the  
tongue through the child seat  
according to the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure  
the belt webbing is not twisted.  
4. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle closest to  
the direction the tongue is coming  
from) for that seating position until  
you hear a snap and feel the latch  
engage. Make sure the tongue is  
latched securely by pulling on it.  
160  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
5. To put the retractor in the  
automatic locking mode, grasp the  
shoulder portion of the belt and pull  
downward until all of the belt is  
pulled out.  
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it  
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.  
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is  
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt  
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.  
8. Remove remaining slack from the  
belt. Force the seat down with extra  
weight, e.g., by pressing down or  
kneeling on the child restraint while  
pulling up on the shoulder belt in  
order to force slack from the belt.  
This is necessary to remove the  
remaining slack that will exist once  
the additional weight of the child is  
added to the child restraint. It also  
helps to achieve the proper  
snugness of the child seat to the  
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean  
towards the buckle will additionally  
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.  
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to  
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.  
161  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
10. Before placing the child in the  
seat, forcibly move the seat forward  
and back to make sure the seat is  
securely held in place. To check  
this, grab the seat at the belt path  
and attempt to move it side to side  
and forward and back. There should  
be no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of  
movement for proper installation.  
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger  
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly  
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for  
referral to a CPST.  
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH  
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments  
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)  
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet  
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind  
that seating position.  
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted  
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH  
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment  
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,  
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For  
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to  
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided  
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a  
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety  
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety  
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.  
162  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Your vehicle has LATCH lower  
anchors for child seat installation at  
the seating positions marked with  
the child seat symbol.  
The LATCH anchors are located at  
the rear section of the rear seat  
between the cushion and seat back,  
below the locator symbols on the  
seat back. Follow the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions to  
properly install a child seat with  
LATCH attachments.  
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.  
Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this  
chapter.  
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors  
shown.  
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same  
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold  
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious  
injury or death.  
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,  
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block  
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower  
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of  
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able  
to be properly restrained.  
163  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions  
(center seating use)  
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced  
460 mm (18 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower  
anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid  
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.  
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can  
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.  
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is  
attached to that anchor.  
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors  
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH  
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at  
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.  
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have  
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not  
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat  
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug  
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just  
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.  
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly  
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the  
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to  
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this  
for a proper installation.  
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being  
injured in a crash greatly increases.  
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching  
child safety seats  
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower  
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.  
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer  
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children  
in this chapter.  
164  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps  
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which  
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring  
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an  
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your  
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a  
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach  
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.  
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap  
anchors located behind the seats as described below.  
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked  
with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).  
The tether strap anchors in your  
vehicle are in the following positions  
(shown from top view):  
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.  
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other  
than the correct tether anchor.  
Once the child safety seat has been installed, using either the safety belt,  
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top  
tether strap.  
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether  
anchor:  
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.  
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under  
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route  
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.  
2. Locate the correct anchor for the  
selected seating position.  
165  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
3. Open the tether anchor cover.  
4. Clip the tether strap to the  
anchor as shown.  
If the tether strap is clipped  
incorrectly, the child safety seat may  
not be retained properly in the  
event of a collision.  
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being  
injured in a collision greatly increases.  
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the  
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends  
its use.  
Child booster seats  
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of  
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,  
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are  
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide  
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.  
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,  
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly  
secured to the vehicle.  
166  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children  
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder  
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt  
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of  
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child  
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning  
booster.  
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit  
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips  
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while  
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit  
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the  
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a  
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in  
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.  
When children should use booster seats  
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the  
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and  
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a  
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to  
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to  
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).  
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved  
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches  
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).  
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these  
questions when seated without a booster seat:  
Can the child sit all the way back  
against the vehicle seat back with  
knees bent comfortably at the  
edge of the seat cushion?  
Can the child sit without  
slouching?  
Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?  
Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?  
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?  
167  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Types of booster seats  
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless  
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle  
lap/shoulder belt.  
Backless booster seats  
If your backless booster seat has a  
removable shield, remove the  
shield. If a vehicle seating position  
has a low seat back or no head  
restraint, a backless booster seat  
may place your child’s head (as  
measured at the tops of the ears)  
above the top of the seat. In this  
case, move the backless booster  
to another seating position with a  
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider  
using a high back booster seat.  
High back booster seats  
If, with a backless booster seat,  
you cannot find a seating position  
that adequately supports your  
child’s head, a high back booster  
seat would be a better choice.  
168  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that  
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the  
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and  
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare  
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck  
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below  
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s  
hips.  
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh  
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this  
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster  
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.  
The importance of shoulder belts  
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s  
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should  
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a  
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.  
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not  
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.  
169  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.  
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder  
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces  
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk  
of injury or death in a collision.  
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance  
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically  
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the  
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears  
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including  
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support  
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if  
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety  
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be  
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information  
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all  
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be  
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer  
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate  
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in  
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either  
damage or improper operation is noted.  
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning  
chapter.  
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the  
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above  
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a  
collision.  
170  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
Tire Quality Grades apply to new  
pneumatic passenger car tires. The  
Quality grades can be found where  
applicable on the tire sidewall  
between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For  
example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United  
States Department of Transportation has set.  
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do  
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or  
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with  
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as  
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).  
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.  
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you  
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government  
has written it.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of  
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and one-half (112) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual  
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the  
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction AA A B C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The  
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured  
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
171  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include  
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.  
Temperature A B C  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the  
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established  
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive  
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
TIRES  
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they  
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.  
Glossary of tire terminology  
Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,  
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle  
can carry.  
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of  
each tire providing information about the tire brand and  
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred  
to as DOT code.  
Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.  
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing  
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s  
load carrying capability.  
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].  
172  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase  
the tire’s load carrying capability.  
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.  
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.  
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has  
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and  
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on  
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.  
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the  
front door.  
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.  
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.  
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that  
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.  
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly  
upon which the tire beads are seated.  
INFLATING YOUR TIRES  
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly  
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure  
without appearing flat.  
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the  
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if  
required.  
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check  
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate  
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.  
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic  
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a  
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire  
pressure gauge.  
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire  
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause  
uneven treadwear patterns.  
173  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire  
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation  
or ЉblowoutЉ, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk  
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling  
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It  
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of  
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air  
pressure and not appear to be flat!  
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure  
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found  
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located  
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire  
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and  
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s  
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the  
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally  
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure  
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire  
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.  
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the  
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or  
Tire Label.  
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also  
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop  
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures  
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.  
To check the pressure in your tire(s):  
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving  
even a mile.  
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more  
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are  
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above  
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold  
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.  
174  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check  
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure  
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air  
pressure inside to go up as you drive.  
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire  
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.  
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.  
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in  
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.  
4. Replace the valve cap.  
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.  
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the  
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare  
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at  
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the  
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store  
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as  
shown on the Tire Label.  
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other  
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air  
leak.  
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.  
TIRE CARE  
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems  
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and  
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the  
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts  
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace  
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and  
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is  
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be  
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show  
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely  
to blow out or fail.  
175  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear  
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and  
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:  
Tire wear  
When the tread is worn down to  
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must  
be replaced to help prevent your  
vehicle from skidding and  
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear  
indicators, or “wear bars”, which  
look like narrow strips of smooth  
rubber across the tread will appear  
on the tire when the tread is worn  
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).  
When the tire tread wears down to  
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be  
replaced.  
Damage  
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as  
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and  
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected  
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged  
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also  
recommended.  
WARNING: Age  
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as  
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,  
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.  
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread  
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading  
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be  
replaced more frequently.  
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or  
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.  
176  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all  
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code  
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size  
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was  
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After  
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th  
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for  
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect  
requires a recall.  
Tire replacement requirements  
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and  
handling capability.  
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the  
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric  
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally  
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found  
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label  
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this  
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not  
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your  
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use  
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,  
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you  
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized  
dealer as soon as possible.  
177  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you  
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the  
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions  
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure  
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.  
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)  
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following  
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:  
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.  
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.  
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel  
assembly.  
4. Use both eye and ear protection.  
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the  
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional  
should do the mounting.  
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person  
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire  
wheel assembly.  
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road  
tires are replaced on your vehicle.  
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be  
replaced as a pair.  
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on  
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.  
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company  
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.  
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your  
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some  
component of the TPMS may be damaged.  
Safety practices  
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.  
Observe posted speed limits  
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns  
Avoid potholes and objects on the road  
178  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking  
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do  
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and  
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five  
seconds.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
Highway hazards  
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you  
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the  
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but  
your safety is more important.  
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you  
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your  
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and  
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,  
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If  
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair  
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
Tire and wheel alignment  
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your  
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your  
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be  
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment  
periodically.  
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid  
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.  
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear  
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.  
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and  
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.  
Tire rotation  
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the  
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will  
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and  
longer tire life.  
179  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)/All  
Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles  
(front tires at top of diagram)  
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.  
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check  
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical  
problem involved before tire rotation.  
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A  
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is  
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If  
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use  
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.  
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked  
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.  
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
180  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Information on “P” type tires  
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a  
tire size, load index and speed  
rating. The definitions of these  
items are listed below. (Note that  
the tire size, load index and speed  
rating for your vehicle may be  
different from this example.)  
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by  
the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that may be used for  
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and  
light trucks.  
Note: If your tire size does not  
begin with a letter this may mean it  
is designated by either ETRTO  
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire  
Manufacturing Association).  
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from  
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the  
wider the tire.  
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width.  
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your  
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel  
diameter.  
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how  
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your  
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the  
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of  
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires  
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation  
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference  
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph  
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.  
181  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
Letter rating  
Speed rating - mph (km/h)  
81 mph (130 km/h)  
87 mph (140 km/h)  
99 mph (159 km/h)  
106 mph (171 km/h)  
112 mph (180 km/h)  
118 mph (190 km/h)  
124 mph (200 km/h)  
130 mph (210 km/h)  
149 mph (240 km/h)  
168 mph (270 km/h)  
186 mph (299 km/h)  
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph  
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For  
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire  
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.  
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the  
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The  
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was  
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four  
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,  
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers  
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The  
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This  
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.  
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or  
AT: All Terrain, or  
AS: All Season.  
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of  
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and  
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the  
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.  
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and  
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the  
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.  
182  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades  
Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the  
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150  
would wear one and one-half (112) times as well on the government  
course as a tire graded 100.  
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,  
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement  
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its  
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire  
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at  
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is  
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation  
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the  
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than  
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.  
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such  
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.  
183  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type  
tires  
“LT” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below.  
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not  
apply to this type of tire.  
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by  
the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that is intended for service  
on light trucks.  
2. Load Range/Load Inflation  
Limits: Indicates the tire’s  
load-carrying capabilities and its  
inflation limits.  
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the  
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined  
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).  
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the  
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;  
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.  
184  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Information on “T” type tires  
“T” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire  
size.  
Note: The temporary tire size for  
your vehicle may be different from  
this example. Tire Quality Grades do  
not apply to this type of tire.  
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,  
designated by the Tire and Rim  
Association (T&RA), that is  
intended for temporary service on  
cars, SUVs, minivans and light  
trucks.  
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width  
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,  
the larger the number, the wider the tire.  
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.  
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.  
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your  
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel  
diameter.  
Location of the tire label  
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size  
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the  
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.  
185  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)  
Each tire, including the spare (if  
provided), should be checked  
monthly when cold and inflated to  
the inflation pressure recommended  
by the vehicle manufacturer on the  
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires  
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire  
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire  
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure  
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should  
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the  
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the  
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces  
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire  
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire  
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger  
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator  
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS  
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.  
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for  
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.  
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as  
the malfunction exists.  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be  
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions  
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of  
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the  
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction  
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to  
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the  
TPMS to continue to function properly.  
186  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC  
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a  
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure  
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,  
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain  
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,  
vehicle rollover and personal injury.  
Changing tires with TPMS  
Each road tire is equipped with  
a tire pressure sensor located  
inside the tire/wheel cavity. The  
pressure sensor is attached to  
the valve stem. The pressure  
sensor is covered by the tire and  
is not visible unless the tire is  
removed. Care must be taken  
when changing the tire to avoid  
damaging the sensor. It is  
recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized  
dealer.  
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using  
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.  
187  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four  
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low  
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is  
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under  
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire  
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,  
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org  
for additional information.  
When your temporary spare tire is installed  
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary  
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you  
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on  
your vehicle.  
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,  
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your  
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS  
in this section.  
188  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
When you believe your system is not operating properly  
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you  
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is  
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the  
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System:  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)  
under-inflated  
1. Check your tire pressure to  
ensure tires are properly  
inflated; refer to Inflating  
your tires in this chapter.  
2. After inflating your tires to  
the manufacturer’s  
recommended inflation  
pressure as shown on the Tire  
Label (located on the edge of  
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),  
the vehicle must be driven for  
at least two minutes over  
20 mph (32 km/h) before the  
light will turn OFF.  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel/tire and reinstall it on  
the vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
on how the system functions,  
refer to When your temporary  
spare tire is installed in this  
section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the light  
remains ON, contact your  
authorized dealer as soon as  
possible.  
189  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Flashing Warning  
Light  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel and re-mount it on the  
vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
of how the system functions  
under these conditions, refer to  
When your temporary spare  
tire is installed in this section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the TPMS  
warning light still flashes,  
contact your authorized dealer  
as soon as possible.  
When inflating your tires  
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your  
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond  
immediately to the air added to your tires.  
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the  
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended  
inflation pressure.  
How temperature affects your tire pressure  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in  
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical  
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi  
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary  
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the  
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi  
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower  
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower  
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning  
for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is ON, visually  
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires are flat,  
repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is  
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where  
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended  
inflation pressure.  
190  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS  
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed  
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or  
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and  
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of  
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.  
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could  
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit  
failure.  
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in  
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow  
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel  
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip  
aluminum wheels.  
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:  
Use only SAE class ЉSЉ cables or equivalent on the front axle for  
P205/60R16 equipped vehicles. SAE class “S” chains or other  
conventional link chains may cause damage to the vehicles wheel  
house and/or body.  
Do not install tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices on the  
rear tires. This could cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house or  
body.  
Do not use tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices with  
optional P225/50R17 or P225/45R18 tires.  
Install cable chains securely, verifying that the cables do not touch any  
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.  
Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against your  
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the cables. If this does not work, remove  
the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle.  
If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.  
Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use  
tire cables on dry roads.  
The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle  
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when  
using snow tires and chains.  
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.  
191  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
VEHICLE LOADING  
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle to keep  
your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly  
loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design  
performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the  
following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings from the  
vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:  
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of  
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or  
optional equipment.  
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you  
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket  
equipment.  
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the  
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found  
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door  
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire  
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND  
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for  
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum  
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket  
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the  
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the  
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.  
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can  
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is  
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should  
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,  
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or  
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle  
control and vehicle rollover.  
192  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Example only:  
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,  
including cargo and optional equipment.  
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle  
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.  
193  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These  
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total  
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +  
passengers.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,  
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety  
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the  
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.  
194  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Example only:  
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle  
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural  
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal  
injury.  
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.  
195  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load  
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may  
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires  
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR  
and GAWR limitations.  
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could  
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.  
Steps for determining the correct load limit:  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will  
be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX  
kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage  
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)  
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on  
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:  
Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load  
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and  
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh  
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –  
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have  
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and  
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x  
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.  
196  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up  
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio  
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of  
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for  
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity  
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each  
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12  
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough  
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the  
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -  
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least  
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then  
the load calculation would be:  
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have  
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In  
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x  
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.  
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your  
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.  
TRAILER TOWING  
WARNING: Never tow a trailer with this vehicle. Your vehicle is  
not equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through  
an authorized dealer.  
RECREATIONAL TOWING  
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow  
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a  
truck).  
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to  
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate  
controls chapter for more information.  
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to  
Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle.  
197  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) 2.5L and 3.0L vehicles:  
Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground  
or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are  
using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment  
provider.  
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow  
these instructions:  
For automatic transmission vehicles, have your transmission  
fluid level checked by an authorized dealer. For the correct  
transmission fluid level when flat towing (all four wheels on the  
ground), refer to Transmission fluid in the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter.  
Tow only in the forward direction.  
Release the parking brake.  
Place the transmission shift lever in (N) Neutral.  
Place the ignition to the accessory position (refer to Starting in the  
Driving chapter).  
Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) for automatic transmission vehicles  
and 70 mph (113 km/h) for manual transmission vehicles.  
For automatic transmission vehicles, start the engine and allow it to  
run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and every six hours  
thereafter. With the engine running and your foot on the brake, shift  
into (D) Drive and then into (R) Reverse before shifting back into N  
(Neutral).  
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 3.0L vehicles:  
Tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or  
with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do  
not tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off  
the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the  
ground. This will cause damage to your AWD system. If you are using a  
vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the  
equipment provider.  
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow  
these instructions:  
For automatic transmission vehicles, have your transmission  
fluid level checked by an authorized dealer. For the correct  
transmission fluid level when flat towing (all four wheels on the  
ground), refer to Transmission fluid in the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter.  
198  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Tow only in the forward direction.  
Release the parking brake.  
Place the transmission shift lever in (N) Neutral.  
Place the ignition to the accessory position (refer to Starting in the  
Driving chapter).  
Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) for automatic transmission vehicles  
and 70 mph (113 km/h) for manual transmission vehicles.  
For automatic transmission vehicles, start the engine and allow it to  
run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and every six hours  
thereafter. With the engine running and your foot on the brake, shift  
into (D) Drive and then into (R) Reverse before shifting back into N  
(Neutral).  
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) 3.5L vehicles:  
Do not tow the vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground or  
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle  
with the front drive wheels on a dolly or with all four (4) wheels off the  
ground on a car-hauling trailer.  
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to the  
Wrecker towing section in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 3.5L vehicles:  
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or  
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle  
with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling  
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.  
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to the  
Wrecker towing section in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
199  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
STARTING  
Positions of the ignition  
1. Off— locks the gearshift lever  
and allows key removal. This  
position also shuts the engine and  
all electrical accessories off.  
2. Accessory— allows the electrical  
accessories such as the radio to  
operate while the engine is not  
running.  
3. On— all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key  
position when driving.  
4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine  
starts.  
Starting your vehicle  
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard  
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio  
noise.  
Don’t press the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the  
accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more  
information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this  
chapter.  
To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures  
(below -20°F [-30°C]), it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up  
to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above  
50 mph (80 km/h). Normal operating temperature is normally reached  
after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling.  
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce  
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,  
creating the risk of fire or other damage.  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
200  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in  
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open  
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against  
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have  
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you  
smell exhaust fumes.  
Important safety precautions  
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If  
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle  
checked.  
Before starting the vehicle:  
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts. For more  
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating  
and Safety Restraints chapter.  
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.  
If starting a vehicle with an  
2
1
automatic transmission:  
Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
201  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Make sure the gearshift is in P  
(Park).  
If starting a vehicle with a manual  
transmission:  
Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
Push the clutch pedal to the  
floor.  
3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without  
turning the key to 4 (start).  
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and  
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information  
regarding the warning lights.  
202  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Starting the engine  
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without  
turning the key to 4 (start).  
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then  
release the key as soon as the  
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle  
has a computer assisted cranking  
system that assists in starting the  
engine. After releasing the key from  
the 4 (start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to  
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.  
Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off  
position.  
3. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the  
brake, shift into gear and drive.  
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off  
position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again. If the engine still fails to  
start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again, keeping the  
accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above  
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off  
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.  
Guarding against exhaust fumes  
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid  
its dangerous effects.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have  
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you  
smell exhaust fumes.  
Important ventilating information  
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of  
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or  
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.  
203  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)  
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting  
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle  
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element  
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows  
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical  
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor  
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).  
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions  
could result in property damage or physical injury.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use  
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged  
(cheater) adapters.  
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for  
proper and safe operation:  
For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product  
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards  
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used  
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use  
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord  
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.  
Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.  
Use as short an extension cord as possible.  
Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord  
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to  
the outlet without stretching.  
Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not  
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at  
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate  
extension cords over a period of time.  
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with  
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.  
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good  
condition before use.  
Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine  
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order  
to prevent possible shock or fire.  
204  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of  
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and  
similar items.  
Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord  
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to  
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure  
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system  
has been operating for approximately a half hour.  
Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall  
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.  
How to use the engine block heater  
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean  
them, use a dry cloth.  
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block  
heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your  
factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;  
however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three  
hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will  
not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional  
electricity.  
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the  
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the  
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.  
BRAKES  
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding  
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out  
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has  
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the  
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.  
Refer to Warning lights and  
!
P
chimes in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter for information on the brake  
system warning light.  
BRAKE  
205  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This  
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by  
keeping the brakes from locking. The ABS operates by detecting the  
onset of wheel lockup during brake application and compensates for this  
tendency. Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation  
may be observed during ABS braking; any pulsation or mechanical noise  
you may feel or hear is normal. In addition, the ABS performs a  
self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief  
mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal.  
ABS warning lamp  
The ABS lamp in the instrument  
cluster momentarily illuminates  
ABS  
when the ignition is turned on. If  
the light does not illuminate during  
start up, remains on or flashes, the  
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.  
Even when the ABS is disabled and  
!
P
the ABS light is on, normal braking  
is still effective. If your BRAKE  
warning lamp illuminates with the  
parking brake released, have your  
brake system serviced immediately.  
BRAKE  
Using ABS  
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake  
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the  
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping  
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain  
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.  
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance and does not  
decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes.  
206  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Parking brake  
To set the parking brake (1), pull  
the parking brake handle up as far  
as possible.  
2
1
The BRAKE warning lamp will  
illuminate and will remain  
illuminated until the parking brake  
is released.  
!
P
BRAKE  
To release, press and hold the button (2), pull the handle up slightly,  
then push the handle down.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic  
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
ADVANCETRACSTABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM  
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,  
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire  
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling  
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance  
of the AdvanceTracsystem. In addition, installing any stereo  
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac௡  
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible  
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order  
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTracsensors.  
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTracsystem could lead to  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
207  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot  
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a  
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive  
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your  
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.  
Activation of the AdvanceTracsystem is an indication that at least  
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this  
could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially  
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury  
and death. If your AdvanceTracsystem activates, SLOW DOWN.  
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the  
AdvanceTracsystem, the “sliding car” icon  
will illuminate  
steadily, and you may hear a chime. If equipped with a message center,  
the vehicle will also indicate a failure with the brake system, have the  
system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.  
Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTracsystem. The  
AdvanceTracsystem provides the following stability enhancement  
features for certain driving situations:  
Traction Control System (TCS), which functions to help avoid  
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids  
or lateral slides  
The AdvanceTracsystem automatically enables each time the engine is  
started. All features of the AdvanceTracsystem (TCS and ESC) are  
active and monitor the vehicle from start-up. However, the system will  
only intervene if the driving situation requires it.  
The AdvanceTracsystem includes  
an AdvanceTraccontrol switch on  
the instrument panel, a “sliding car”  
icon  
and a “sliding car off”  
icon  
in the instrument cluster.  
Both the “sliding car” icon  
the “sliding car off” icon  
and  
in the instrument cluster will illuminate  
temporarily during start-up as part of a normal system self-check. The  
“sliding car” icon may illuminate (flash) during certain driving  
situations which cause the AdvanceTracsystem to operate. If the  
208  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
“sliding car” icon  
illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an  
authorized dealer immediately. If equipped with a message center, the  
vehicle will also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTracsystem.  
When AdvanceTracperforms a normal system self-check, some drivers  
may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a rumble, grunting, or  
grinding noise after startup and when driving off.  
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTracyou may experience  
the following:  
A slight deceleration of the vehicle  
The “sliding car”  
indicator light will flash.  
If your foot is on the brake pedal, a vibration in the pedal  
If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the  
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You  
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during  
this severe condition.  
The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain  
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly  
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.  
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work  
separately or in tandem; engine traction control and brake traction  
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by  
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit  
wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is  
slipping. Traction Control is most active at low speeds.  
During TCS events the “sliding car” icon  
will flash.  
in the instrument cluster  
If TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking  
portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the  
brakes to cool down. In this situation, TCS will use only engine power  
reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over-spinning.  
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain all features.  
Anti-lock braking and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) will continue to  
function during the cool-down period.  
The engine traction control and brake traction control systems may be  
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac௡  
section below.  
209  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)  
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional  
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely  
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to  
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine  
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide  
laterally.  
During ESC events the “sliding car” icon  
will flash.  
in the instrument cluster  
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate ESC, which include but  
are not limited to:  
Taking a turn too fast  
Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle  
Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces  
Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road  
Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice  
versa  
Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa  
Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer  
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).  
Switching Off AdvanceTrac௡  
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine  
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTracsystem may be  
beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This will restore full  
engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle.  
To switch off the AdvanceTrac௡  
system press the AdvanceTrac௡  
control switch. Full features of the  
AdvanceTracsystem can be  
restored by pressing the  
AdvanceTraccontrol switch again  
or by turning off and restarting the engine.  
When the AdvanceTracsystem is  
off, the “sliding car off” icon  
will  
illuminate steadily. Pressing the  
OFF  
AdvanceTraccontrol switch again  
will turn off the “sliding car off”  
icon.  
210  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine and brake traction control features  
will continue to function; however, ESC is disabled.  
AdvanceTracFeatures  
“Sliding  
car”  
icon  
“Sliding car  
off”  
icon  
Control  
switch  
functions  
Traction  
control  
ESC  
Illuminated  
during bulb during bulb  
Illuminated  
Default at  
start-up  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
check  
check  
Control switch  
pressed  
momentarily  
Control switch  
pressed again  
after  
Not  
illuminated  
Illuminated  
solid  
Not  
illuminated  
Not  
illuminated  
Enabled  
Enabled  
deactivation  
STEERING  
2.5L I4 engine and 3.0L V6 Duratecengine: Your vehicle is  
equipped with an Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. There is no  
fluid reservoir to check or fill.  
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the  
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes  
more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes  
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and  
permanent damage to your steering system. If this should occur, you will  
neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause  
permanent damage. Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the  
system to cool and steering assist will return to normal.  
The EPS system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the  
EPS system to ensure proper operation. When a system error is  
detected, the following message SERVICE POWER STEERING, SERVICE  
POWER STEERING NOW or POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT may  
display in the message center, refer to the Message center in the  
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.  
211  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
WARNING: The EPS has diagnostics checks that continuously  
monitor the EPS to ensure proper operation of the electronic  
system. When an electronic error is detected, the message POWER  
STEERING ASSIST FAULT will be displayed in the message center. If  
this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine.  
After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by restarting the engine,  
and watch the message center for POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT.  
If the message returns, or returns while driving, take the vehicle to  
your dealer to have it checked. With the message displayed, the  
steering assist is turned off, making the vehicle harder to steer.  
WARNING: If the message SERVICE POWER STEERING is  
displayed in the message center, the EPS has detected a  
problem with the system function. On the next key cycle the message  
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW will be displayed and steering  
assist will be removed until the steering system is serviced. Have your  
vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as possible.  
3.5L V6 Duratecengine: Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic  
steering system.  
To help prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the  
steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than  
a few seconds when the engine is running. If the power steering system  
breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle  
manually, but it takes more effort.  
Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level  
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).  
Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low  
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your  
authorized dealer.  
Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering  
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before  
seeking service by your authorized dealer.  
Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on  
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.  
If the steering wanders or pulls equipped with either an EPS or a  
hydraulic steering system, check for:  
an improperly inflated tire  
212  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
uneven tire wear  
loose or worn suspension components  
loose or worn steering components  
improper vehicle alignment  
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering  
seem to wander/pull.  
Speed sensitive steering  
The steering in your vehicle is speed sensitive. At lower speeds the assist  
is increased to improve maneuverability.  
If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while  
driving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system  
checked by your authorized dealer.  
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK  
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents  
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is  
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.  
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in  
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has  
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to  
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the  
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P  
(Park):  
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the  
ignition key to the off position, and  
remove the key.  
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar  
1
tool), carefully pry off and remove  
the chrome trim ring (1) from the  
shifter base.  
2
3. Open the storage compartment  
lid and carefully pry the trim panel  
(2) up from rear attachments on the  
storage compartment and disconnect it from the console to expose the  
inside of the gearshift.  
213  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
4. Locate the brake shift interlock  
lever on the driver’s side of the  
shifter assembly.  
5. Apply the brake pedal. Using a  
screwdriver (or similar tool), press  
and hold the brake shift interlock  
lever while pulling the gearshift  
lever out of the P (Park) position  
and into the N (Neutral) position.  
6. Install the trim panel (2) and  
chrome ring (1) in reverse order.  
7. Apply brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking brake.  
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure  
is used.  
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the  
brake lamps are working.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off  
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer.  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION  
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic  
transmission equipped with a 2.5L I4 engine (if equipped)  
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing  
fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off  
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque  
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the  
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived  
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from  
the accelerator pedal.  
214  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission  
and prevents the front wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Press the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the  
desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and  
securely latch it in P (Park)  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off  
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
D (Drive)  
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission  
operates in gears one through six.  
L (Low)  
This position:  
Provides increased engine braking during downhill/mountain driving.  
Provides extended shift scheduling, allowing both upshifts and  
downshifts, at a higher overall RPM to provide optimum engine  
braking.  
Is not intended for use under extended or normal driving conditions  
and results in lower fuel economy.  
215  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic  
transmission equipped with a 3.0L or 3.5L V6 Duratecengine  
(if equipped)  
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing  
fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off  
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque  
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the  
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived  
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from  
the accelerator pedal.  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission  
and prevents the front wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Press the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the  
desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and  
securely latch it in P (Park)  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Switch the ignition off and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
216  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
D (Drive) with Overdrive  
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission  
operates in gears one through six.  
D (Drive) with Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist  
Initially, moving the lever to (M)  
activates two features at the same  
time: Overdrive cancel and grade  
assist. The message center display  
on the instrument cluster will show  
D and the overdrive cancel and  
grade assist lamp will illuminate.  
1. Overdrive cancel  
Overdrive is deactivated.  
The transmission operates in  
gears one through five.  
The overdrive cancel and grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster  
is illuminated.  
2. Grade assist  
Improves driving experience in hilly terrain or mountainous areas by  
providing additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear  
operation on uphill climbs.  
Provides additional engine braking through the automatic transmission  
shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle acceleration,  
accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).  
Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired  
engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above. This will  
increase engine RPM during engine braking.  
217  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Overdrive cancel with grade assist is designed to provide optimal gear  
selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas. It is recommended that  
you return to O/D (overdrive mode) on flat terrain to provide the best  
fuel economy and transmission function.  
To return to O/D (overdrive mode), move the shift lever back from (M)  
to D (Drive).  
The overdrive cancel and grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster  
will not be illuminated.  
The transmission will operate in gears one through six.  
O/D (overdrive mode) is automatically returned each time the ignition is  
off.  
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST)  
gearshift lever  
This vehicle is equipped with a  
SelectShift Automatic™  
transmission (SST) gearshift lever.  
SST is an automatic transmission  
with the ability for the driver to  
change gears up or down (without a  
clutch) as desired. By moving the  
gearshift lever from drive position  
(D) to the right into Manual (M)  
you now have control of selecting  
the gear you desire.  
Initially when moving the lever to  
the manual mode (M), the message  
center display on the instrument  
cluster will show D and the SST  
light will illuminate. This mode is  
Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist.  
Only by moving the lever in the forward (-) or backward (+) position will  
the transmission utilize the manual mode for select shifting.  
218  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
To manually downshift the transmission:  
1. Move the gearshift lever forward  
to (-).  
2. Release the lever, and it will  
return to the M position. The  
transmission will downshift.  
To manually upshift the  
transmission:  
1. Move the gearshift lever rearward  
into (+).  
2. Release the lever, and it will  
return to the M position. The  
transmission will upshift.  
When selecting the appropriate gear  
in SST mode, the message center  
display on the instrument cluster  
will show the current selected gear  
you are in.  
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which  
may cause it to stall, the SST will still automatically make some  
downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.  
Although the SST will make some downshifts for you, it will still allow  
you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the  
engine will not be damaged from over-revving.  
The SST will not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching  
the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by moving the gearshift lever  
back toward (+) and releasing.  
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held  
without shifting.  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by  
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the  
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.  
219  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
Using the clutch  
Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents  
cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.  
To start the vehicle:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.  
2. Press the clutch pedal to the  
floor, then put the gearshift lever in  
the neutral position.  
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
3. Start the engine.  
4. Press the brake pedal and move  
the gearshift lever to the desired  
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).  
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while  
slowly pressing on the accelerator.  
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor.  
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with  
the full extension of the clutch pedal.  
Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause  
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission  
components or damage the transmission.  
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the  
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a  
hill. These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and  
could nullify a clutch warranty claim.  
220  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Recommended shift speeds  
Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving  
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h). This may damage the clutch and/or  
transmission.  
Upshift according to the following chart:  
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel  
economy)  
Shift from:  
1 - 2  
2 - 3  
3 - 4  
4 - 5  
5 - 6  
15 mph (24 km/h)  
25 mph (40 km/h)  
40 mph (64 km/h)  
45 mph (72 km/h)  
50 mph (80 km/h)  
Reverse  
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into  
R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.  
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least  
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).  
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved to R (Reverse) by pushing  
the knob down before shifting to reverse. This is a lockout feature which  
protects the transmission from accidentally engaging R (Reverse) when  
intending to select 1 (First).  
3. Shift into R (Reverse) by pushing the gearshift knob down, then  
moving the lever fully to the left, then forward.  
If R (Reverse) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and  
return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal for  
a moment, then press it down and shift to R (Reverse) again.  
Parking your vehicle  
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.  
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).  
3. Turn the ignition off.  
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move  
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the  
parking brake fully.  
221  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Removing the key  
Turn the ignition to the off position, and remove the key.  
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of  
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the  
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not  
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain  
angular or moving objects.  
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and  
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as  
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some  
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat  
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the  
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false  
activation.  
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution  
when in R (Reverse) and when using the RSS.  
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with  
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a  
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to  
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller  
objects, particularly those close to the ground.  
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,  
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the  
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.  
222  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
The RSS detects obstacles up to six  
feet (two meters) from the rear  
bumper with a decreased coverage  
area at the outer corners of the  
bumper, (refer to the figures for  
approximate zone coverage areas).  
As you move closer to the obstacle,  
the rate of the tone increases. When  
the obstacle is less than 10 inches  
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound  
continuously. If the RSS detects a  
stationary or receding object further  
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the  
side of the vehicle, the tone will  
sound for only three seconds. Once  
the system detects an object  
approaching, the tone will sound  
again.  
While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a  
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return  
to the previous value.  
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R  
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows  
the driver to disable the system. Refer to Message center in the  
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.  
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free  
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the  
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will  
affect the accuracy of the RSS.  
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving  
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing  
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.  
223  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
The rearview camera system,  
located on the trunk, provides a  
video image which appears in the  
rearview mirror or on the navigation  
screen (if equipped), of the area  
behind the vehicle. It adds  
assistance to the driver while  
reversing or reverse parking the  
vehicle.  
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an  
image will display in the rearview mirror or on the navigation screen (if  
equipped). The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the  
vehicle orientation and/or road condition.  
(1) Rear bumper  
(2) Red zone  
(3) Yellow zone  
(4) Green zone  
Always use caution while backing.  
Objects in the red zone are closest  
to your vehicle and objects in the  
green zone are further away. Objects  
are getting closer to your vehicle as  
they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones.  
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both  
sides and rear of the vehicle.  
Image delay if displayed through the rear view mirror:  
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in  
the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off  
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.  
Image delay if displayed through the navigation screen:  
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),  
the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed  
reaches five mph (8 km/h), only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or  
until any navigation radio button is pressed.  
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the  
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen to set the rear camera  
delay feature to on or off. Refer to the Navigation System supplement  
for more information.  
224  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
The camera lens for the camera is located on the trunk. Keep the lens  
clean so that the video image remains clear and undistorted. Clean the  
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.  
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may  
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If  
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the reverse camera  
system.  
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement  
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with  
the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.  
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the  
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen  
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.  
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds  
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.  
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the trunk open.  
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your  
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper  
coverage and operation.  
Night time and dark area use  
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse  
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both  
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If  
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at  
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.  
Servicing  
If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have  
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.  
If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the  
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear  
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.  
225  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) WITH CROSS  
TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) (IF EQUIPPED)  
The BLISis a convenience feature  
that aids the driver in assessing  
whether a vehicle is within an area  
on either side of the vehicle  
extending rearward from the outside  
mirrors to approximately 10 feet  
(three meters) beyond the bumper.  
This area is referred to as the blind  
zone. The BLISwill alert the driver  
to the presence of motorized  
vehicles in these areas while driving  
on roads and freeways.  
The system is not designed to  
prevent contact with other vehicles  
or objects. The system is designed  
to provide a warning to assist the  
driver in detecting vehicles in the blind zones. The system will not detect  
infrastructure, pedestrians, or cyclists.  
WARNING: To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLISas a  
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking  
over your shoulder before changing lanes. BLISis not a replacement  
for careful driving and only an assist.  
The BLIShas an yellow indicator  
(also referred to as the alert)  
located in the left and right exterior  
mirrors. When the vehicle is started,  
the BLISautomatically illuminates  
both indicators for several seconds  
indicating the system is operating.  
The first time you place the  
transmission in D (Drive) after starting the engine and drive forward at a  
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) the BLISbecomes active.  
Afterwards, the BLIS remains active for all speeds including zero mph.  
BLISis also active if the transmission is placed in N (Neutral). If the  
transmission is shifted out of D (Drive) or N (Neutral) the system will  
enter the CTA mode (see CTA operation below). Once shifted back in to  
D (Drive) the BLISmode will activate once driven above 3 mph  
(5 km/h).  
226  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
The BLISwill trigger the alert for vehicles that enter your blind zone  
from the rear or merge in to the blind zone from the side. Vehicles that  
you pass, or a vehicle that enters the blind zone from the front, will  
trigger the alert only after the vehicle is present in the blind zone for  
three seconds. Note: For vehicles that pass through the blind zone  
quickly, typically less then two seconds, the BLISwill not illuminate the  
alert.  
The BLISconsists of two radar  
sensors each located rearward of  
the rear wheel hidden behind the  
bumper fascia. Do not place any  
type of bumper sticker in this area.  
Note: The BLIStypically will not  
detect parked vehicles, humans,  
animals, or infrastructure (fences,  
guard rails, trees, etc.). The BLIS௡  
does not function when the transmission is in R (Reverse) or P (Park).  
The BLISdoes not provide any additional warning when your turn  
signal is activated.  
BLISdetection limitations: Due to the nature of radar technology,  
there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the  
blind spot zones may not be detected. Below is a list of circumstances  
that may cause non-detection:  
Debris build up on the rear quarter panel fascias  
Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone  
Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates  
Severe weather conditions  
When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone.  
BLISFalse Alerts  
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances  
when the BLISwill alert with no object present in the blind zone. This  
is known as a false alert. Some level of false alerts are normal.  
Circumstances that may cause a false alert are guardrails, freeway  
concrete walls, cyclone fencing, sharp turns around a pole or building, or  
coming to a stop with a vehicle directly behind but very close. False  
alerts are temporary and self correct.  
227  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Cross traffic alert (CTA) system operation  
The CTA system warns the driver of approaching vehicles when R  
(Reverse) is selected and the vehicle is backing out of a front-in parking  
spot. It sounds a series of tones and flashes the BLISindicator found on  
the exterior mirror on the side of the approaching vehicle. Additionally,  
the message center will display either, VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT  
or VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT to warn the driver from which  
direction vehicles are approaching.  
The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or  
objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver  
in detecting vehicles in the blind zones. The system will not detect  
infrastructure, pedestrians, or bicyclists.  
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the CTA  
system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors  
and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space.  
CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist.  
The CTA system detects vehicles approaching up to 45 feet (14 meters)  
away (approximately the width of five parking spaces). Coverage  
decreases when vehicles and objects in close proximity block the CTA  
sensors (refer to figure for approximate zone coverage areas [sensor  
obstructed to vehicle on left]). Backing slowly from the parking spot  
in these situations helps to increase the sensor coverage and  
effectiveness.  
228  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
CTA coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles (refer to  
figure for approximate zone coverage areas [sensor obstructed to  
vehicle on left]).  
CTA detection limitations: Due to the nature of radar technology,  
there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the  
blind spot zones may not be detected. Below is a list of circumstances  
that may cause non detection:  
Debris build up on the rear quarter panel fascias  
The rear quarter panel radar beams are obstructed or partially  
obstructed by an adjacently parked vehicle or object.  
Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph  
(24 km/h)  
Severe weather conditions  
Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph (5 km/h)  
Backing out of an angled parking spot  
CTA False Alerts  
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances  
when the BLISwill alert with no object present when backing up. This  
is known as a false alert. Some level of false alerts are normal.  
Circumstances that may cause a false alert when backing up are backing  
out of a garage, backing in to a parking space, and objects very close to  
the sensor. False alerts are temporary and self correct.  
229  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
CTA and Reverse Sensing System (RSS) interaction  
CTA works along with the Reverse Sensing System (RSS) (if equipped).  
Become familiar with the warning tones of both systems.  
BLIS-CTA on/off and disable operation  
The BLISand/or the CTA can be turned off via the message center.  
Turning the BLISoff does not turn off the CTA and visa versa. If either  
the BLISor CTA is turned off, the systems will automatically turn back  
on at the next ignition key cycle. When either the BLISor CTA is  
turned off, the message center displays BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and/or  
CTA SYSTEM OFF. When the BLISor CTA system is off, the driver will  
not receive alerts. Refer to Message Center in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter.  
The BLIS-CTA can be disabled permanently even after an ignition key  
cycle. This must be done by your dealership service technician.  
Once either of the systems are disabled, enabling must also be performed  
at the dealership. When disabled, the message center will display BLIND  
SPOT DISABLED and/or CTA DISABLED.  
BLIS-CTA fault operation  
If the BLIS-CTA senses a fault on either the left or right sensor, the  
BLISalert indicator will go ON and remain ON and the message center  
will display BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM  
FAULT. For faults that may cause the associated left or right alert  
indicator not to illuminate, only the message center faults will occur.  
Blocked sensor  
An extreme build up of materials on  
the left and/or right quarter panel  
fascias such as mud or snow can  
cause degraded performance of the  
BLIS. Also, heavy rain can cause  
the same effect. The BLIScan  
detect this degraded performance  
and issue a blocked warning to the  
driver via the message center. If condition is determined by the system,  
the message center displays BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE or CROSS  
TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE warning and the appropriate left and/or right  
exterior mirror alert indicator will illuminate. The message center  
warning may be cleared by the driver but the exterior mirror alert  
indicator will remain illuminated.  
230  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
WARNING: Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked  
condition and alerting the driver, the number of missed objects  
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLISas a  
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over  
your shoulder before changing lanes. BLISis not a replacement for  
careful driving and only an assist.  
Once blockage is removed, the system will require some driving time and  
detection of at least two vehicle object prior to realizing it is unblocked,  
or the driver can cycle the ignition key. If blocked and the ignition key is  
cycled, the system resets to unblocked. If however blockage is still  
present after the key cycle, the system will sense again that it is blocked  
after driving in traffic.  
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message  
being displayed:  
The surface of the left or right  
radar is dirty or obstructed in  
some way  
Clean the fascia area in front of  
the radar, either left or right side,  
or remove obstruction.  
The surface of the left or right  
radar is not dirty or obstructed  
Drive normally in traffic for a few  
minutes to allow the radar to  
detect that it is no longer blocked.  
Note: the vehicle must be in D  
(Drive) and a few vehicles must  
pass so that the BLIScan clear a  
blocked state.  
Heavy rainfall or heavy snowfall is No action required by the driver.  
interfering with the radar signals  
The system will automatically go  
unblocked once the  
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or  
stops. Do not use BLIS-CTA in  
heavy rainfall or heavy snowfall.  
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage  
warning and not be blocked. This is rare and known as a false blockage  
warning. A false blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a  
key cycle.  
Trailer tow false alerts  
When towing a trailer, the left and right sensor may detect the trailer  
thus causing a false alert. It may be desirable to turn the BLISoff if the  
false alerts become annoying.  
231  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Day and night brightness  
The BLIS-CTA alert will automatically dim when the headlamp switch is  
in PARK, ON, or AUTO ON and night time darkness has been detected  
by the sun sensor.  
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)  
system. The AWD system is an active system, meaning it not only  
responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the  
ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels  
before slip occurs. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no  
input from the operator.  
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no  
maintenance.  
Note: When an AWD system fault is present, the warning CHECK AWD  
will display in the message center. The AWD system is not functioning  
correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive. When this warning is  
displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.  
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size  
other than the tire provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire  
size (other than the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sizes  
between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop  
functioning and default to front wheel drive.  
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD  
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which  
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise  
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle  
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive  
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your  
warranty.  
Driving on slippery surfaces with AWD vehicles  
AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and  
rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat  
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.  
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside  
temperatures, use a low gear or (L) when possible. L (Low) gear  
operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.  
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to  
protect overheating of the engine.  
232  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Basic operating principles  
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering  
characteristics of your vehicle.  
Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by  
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but  
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the  
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering  
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.  
It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow  
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose  
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too  
sharply or abruptly.  
It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway  
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a  
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide  
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the  
safety of others should be your primary concern.  
If your vehicle gets stuck  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by  
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a traction control system, it may be  
beneficial to disengage the traction control system while attempting to  
rock the vehicle.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage  
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may  
overheat.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off  
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
233  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
Emergency maneuvers  
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn  
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,  
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid  
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,  
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or  
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are  
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could  
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover  
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the  
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.  
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not  
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.  
If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from  
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle  
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,  
avoid these abrupt inputs.  
AWD Systems (if equipped)  
AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction,  
enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a  
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.  
Sand  
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid  
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower  
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly  
and avoid spinning the wheels.  
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside  
temperatures, use a low gear or (L) when possible. L (Low) gear  
operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.  
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to  
protect overheating of the engine.  
234  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you  
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may  
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back  
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.  
Mud and water  
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake  
capability may be limited.  
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher  
than the bottom of the wheel rims (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the  
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.  
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the  
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving  
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you  
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As  
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid  
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of  
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.  
If the engine, transmission, AWD System components or axles are  
submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if  
necessary.  
Driving through deep water may damage the engine or  
transmission.  
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and  
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if  
necessary.  
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts  
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an  
imbalance that could damage drive components.  
“Tread Lightly” is an educational  
program designed to increase public  
awareness of land-use regulations  
and responsibilities in our nations  
wilderness areas. Ford Motor  
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land  
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and  
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”  
235  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain  
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up  
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up  
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep  
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and  
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand  
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without  
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse  
over a hill without the aid of an observer.  
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than  
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has  
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.  
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.  
It is better to back down to a safe location.  
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much  
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of  
vehicle control.  
Descend a hill in the same gear you  
would use to climb up the hill to  
avoid excessive brake application  
and brake overheating. Do not  
descend in neutral; instead,  
disengage overdrive or manually  
shift to a lower gear. When  
descending a steep hill, avoid  
sudden hard braking as you could  
lose control. The front wheels have  
to be turning in order to steer the  
vehicle.  
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do  
not “pump” the brakes.  
Driving on snow and ice  
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.  
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but  
can skid like any other vehicle.  
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the  
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.  
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on  
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting  
from a full stop.  
236  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving  
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate  
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any  
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do  
not become overconfident as to road conditions.  
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles  
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower  
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since  
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),  
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter  
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.  
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require  
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.  
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid  
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control  
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle  
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you  
regain control of the vehicle.  
Maintenance and Modifications  
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed  
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty  
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor  
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such  
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by  
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.  
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make  
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.  
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle  
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).  
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase  
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities  
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of  
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to  
heavy off-highway usage.  
237  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
DRIVING THROUGH WATER  
If driving through deep or standing  
water is unavoidable, proceed very  
slowly especially when the depth is  
not known. Never drive through  
water that is higher than the bottom  
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the  
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).  
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.  
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your  
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where  
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the  
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.  
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your  
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.  
238  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE  
Getting roadside assistance  
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor  
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This  
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service  
is available:  
24–hours, seven days a week  
for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card  
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.  
Roadside assistance will cover:  
a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been  
supplied with a tire inflation kit)  
battery jump start  
lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s  
responsibility)  
fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by  
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of  
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel  
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a  
12-month period.  
winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or  
county maintained road, no recoveries.  
towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized  
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the  
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an  
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement  
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in  
excess of 35 miles (56 km).  
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle  
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,  
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any  
roadside services.  
239  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide  
for information on:  
coverage period  
exact fuel amounts  
towing of your disabled vehicle  
emergency travel expense reimbursement  
travel planning benefits  
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may  
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside  
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact  
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.  
Using roadside assistance  
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your  
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the  
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is  
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.  
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside  
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.  
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call  
1-800-665-2006.  
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor  
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest  
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement  
information, U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call  
1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original  
receipts.  
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call  
1–800–665–2006.  
240  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL  
The hazard flasher is located  
between the center air registers  
above the radio. The hazard flashers  
will operate whether the ignition is  
off or on.  
Press in the flasher control and all  
front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again  
to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a  
safety hazard for other motorists.  
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.  
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH (3.5L ENGINE)  
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine  
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.  
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch  
may have been activated.  
The fuel pump shut-off switch is  
located in the front passenger  
footwell area in the right upper  
corner.  
To reset the switch:  
1. Turn the ignition to the off  
position.  
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.  
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the  
switch by pushing in on the reset  
button.  
4. Turn the ignition to the on  
position.  
5. Wait a few seconds and return  
the key to off position.  
6. Make another check for leaks.  
241  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuel Pump Shut-off (2.5L and 3.0L engines)  
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped  
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the  
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.  
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may  
restart your vehicle by doing the following:  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position.  
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.  
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to  
restart and may take one additional attempt.  
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks  
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.  
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected  
by an authorized dealer after any collision.  
FUSES AND RELAYS  
Fuses  
If electrical components in the  
vehicle are not working, a fuse may  
have blown. Blown fuses are  
identified by a broken wire within  
the fuse. Check the appropriate  
15  
fuses before replacing any electrical  
components.  
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage  
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire  
damage and could start a fire.  
242  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
Standard fuse amperage rating and color  
COLOR  
Cartridge  
maxi  
fuses  
Fuse  
rating  
Mini  
fuses  
Standard  
fuses  
Maxi  
fuses  
Fuse link  
cartridge  
2A  
3A  
4A  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
5A  
7.5A  
10A  
15A  
20A  
25A  
30A  
40A  
50A  
60A  
70A  
80A  
Brown  
Red  
Brown  
Red  
Yellow  
Green  
Orange  
Red  
Blue  
Tan  
Natural  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Brown  
Black  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Black  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by  
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.  
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel  
cover.  
243  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
The fuses are coded as follows.  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
30A  
Protected Circuits  
1
2
Driver smart window motor  
Brake on/off switch, Center  
high-mounted stop lamp  
Not used (Spare)  
Not used (Spare)  
Keypad illumination, Brake shift  
interlock  
15A  
3
4
5
15A  
30A  
10A  
6
7
8
9
10  
20A  
10A  
10A  
15A  
15A  
Turn signal lamps, Stop lamps  
Low beam headlamps (left)  
Low beam headlamps (right)  
Courtesy lamps  
Backlighting, Puddle lamps  
244  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
10A  
Protected Circuits  
11  
12  
13  
14  
AWD module  
Power outside mirrors  
SYNCmodule  
Electronic finish panel (EFP)  
radio and climate control buttons  
module, Navigation display, Center  
information display, GPS module  
Climate control  
Not used (Spare)  
Door locks, Trunk release  
Heated seats  
Amplifier  
On-board diagnostic connector  
Fog lamps  
Front sidemarker lamps, Park  
lamps, License plate lamp  
High beam headlamps  
Horn  
Demand lamps/power saver relay  
Instrument cluster battery power  
Ignition switch  
Radio crank sense circuit  
Instrument cluster ignition power  
Not used (Spare)  
7.5A  
5A  
10A  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
10A  
15A  
20A  
20A  
25A  
15A  
15A  
15A  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
15A  
20A  
10A  
10A  
20A  
5A  
5A  
5A  
10A  
10A  
10A  
5A  
Not used (Spare)  
Restraint control module  
Not used (Spare)  
Not used (Spare)  
10A  
Rear park assist, Blind spot  
monitor system, Heated seats,  
AWD, Rear video camera  
245  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
36  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
5A  
Protected Circuits  
Passive anti-theft sensor (PATS)  
transceiver  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
10A  
20A  
20A  
20A  
15A  
Not used (Spare)  
Subwoofer amplifier  
Radio  
Not used (Spare)  
Automatic dimming mirror, Moon  
roof, Compass, Ambient lighting  
Electronic stability control,  
Electronic power assist steering  
Not used (Spare)  
42  
10A  
43  
44  
10A  
10A  
Fuel diode/Powertrain control  
module  
45  
46  
5A  
Heated backlight and blower relay  
coil, Wiper washer  
Occupant classification sensor  
(OCS) module, Passenger airbag  
off lamp  
7.5A  
47  
48  
30A Circuit  
Breaker  
Power windows  
Delayed accessory relay  
Power distribution box  
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The  
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your  
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.  
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high  
current fuses.  
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace  
the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the  
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.  
246  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the  
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
1
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
50A*  
Protected Circuits  
Electronic power assist steering  
B+  
2
3
50A*  
40A*  
Electronic power assist steering  
B+  
Powertrain control module (PCM)  
(relay 57 power)  
Not used  
Starter motor (relay 55 power)  
Rear defrost (relay 53 power)  
Not used  
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
pump  
4
5
6
7
8
30A*  
40A*  
40A*  
9
10  
11  
20A*  
30A*  
Wiper washer  
ABS valve  
Not used  
247  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Protected Circuits  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Transmission module (3.5L)  
Alternator  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Console power point  
PCM – Keep alive power, Canister  
vent  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
15A**  
10A**  
20A*  
10A**  
24  
25  
26  
27  
10A**  
Not used  
A/C clutch (relay 43 power)  
Not used  
Not used  
60A*  
80A*  
20A*  
30A*  
30A*  
30A*  
20A*  
Cooling fan motor (2.5L & 3.0L)  
Cooling fan motor (3.5L)  
Front power point  
Fuel relay (relay 54 power)  
Passenger power seat  
Driver power seat  
Moon roof motor power feed  
Not used  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
40A*  
Front A/C blower motor (relay 52  
power)  
36  
37  
38  
39  
1A Diode  
1A Diode  
10A**  
Fuel pump  
One-touch start  
Heated side mirrors  
Not used  
248  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
G8VA relay  
Protected Circuits  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
Not used  
Backup lamps  
Not used  
A/C clutch  
Not used  
Injectors  
G8VA relay  
15A**  
15A**  
10A**  
PCM  
General powertrain components,  
A/C clutch relay, Backup lamps  
Ignition coils  
Emissions related powertrain  
components (2.5L & 3.5L)  
Emissions related powertrain  
components (3.0L)  
Not used  
48  
49  
15A**  
15A**  
20A**  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
Not used  
Full ISO relay Blower motor relay  
Full ISO relay Rear defrost relay  
Full ISO relay Fuel relay  
Full ISO relay Starter relay  
Not used  
Full ISO relay PCM relay  
Not used  
* Cartridge Fuses ** Mini Fuses  
CHANGING THE TIRES  
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.  
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly  
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.  
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will  
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality  
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure  
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.  
249  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage  
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare  
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of  
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for  
damage.  
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.  
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important  
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it  
will no longer function.  
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information  
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.  
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for  
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should  
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size  
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by  
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be  
replaced rather than repaired.  
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that  
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels  
and can be one of three types:  
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire  
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall  
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has  
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR  
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”  
250  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:  
Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)  
Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the  
Safety Compliance Label  
Tow a trailer  
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire  
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time  
Use commercial car washing equipment  
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire  
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel  
location can lead to impairment of the following:  
Handling, stability and braking performance  
Comfort and noise  
Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
Winter weather driving capability  
Wet weather driving capability  
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:  
Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)  
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time  
Use commercial car washing equipment  
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire/wheel  
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to  
impairment of the following:  
Handling, stability and braking performance  
Comfort and noise  
Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
Winter weather driving capability  
Wet weather driving capability  
All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)  
Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)  
251  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional  
caution should be given to:  
Towing a trailer  
Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body  
Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack  
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and  
seek service as soon as possible.  
Stopping and securing the vehicle  
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard  
flashers.  
2. Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or R  
(Reverse) (manual transmission) and turn the engine off.  
Removing the spare tire and jack  
1. Remove the carpeted load floor  
panel located in the rear of the  
vehicle and remove the lug wrench  
and long bolt from the tool bag.  
2. Remove the bolt securing the  
spare tire using the lug wrench,  
then lift and remove the spare tire  
from the trunk.  
3. Remove the jack retention bolt by  
turning it counterclockwise and  
remove the jack from the vehicle.  
252  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Tire change procedure  
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you  
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in  
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and  
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.  
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else  
could be seriously injured.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the  
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to  
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the  
wheel.  
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is  
being jacked.  
1. Block both the front and rear of  
the wheel diagonally opposite the  
flat tire. For example, if the left  
front tire is flat, block the right rear  
wheel.  
2. Remove the center ornament (if  
equipped) from the wheel. Loosen  
each wheel lug nut one-half turn  
counterclockwise but do not remove  
them until the wheel is raised off  
the ground.  
253  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Put the jack in the jack locator  
next to the tire you are changing.  
Turn the jack handle clockwise until  
the wheel is completely off the  
ground.  
Note: To avoid structural damage to  
the vehicle, ensure that the jack is  
centered between the two markings  
(1) on the bottom of the rocker  
flange.  
WARNING: To lessen the  
risk of personal injury, do  
not put any part of your body  
under the vehicle while changing a  
tire. Do not start the engine when  
your vehicle is on the jack. The  
jack is only meant for changing  
the tire.  
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.  
5. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is  
facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.  
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.  
If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear  
to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary  
spare tire.  
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.  
254  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten  
the lug nuts in the order shown.  
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque  
specifications later in this chapter  
for the proper lug nut torque  
specification.  
1
3
4
8. Unblock the wheels.  
5
2
Stowing the wheel and jack  
1. Fully collapse the jack and place it back in the storage area in the  
trunk.  
2. Replace the jack retention bolt to secure the jack.  
3. Place the tire in the storage bin in the trunk.  
4. Replace the cover plate and bolt.  
When storing a flat road tire, flip the cover plate over and use the long  
bolt.  
When storing the temporary spare tire, replace the cover plate and  
use the short bolt.  
5. Secure the bolt using the lug wrench.  
6. Insert the lug wrench and bolt in the tool bag and place over the jack.  
7. Replace the carpeted load floor panel.  
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS  
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)  
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel  
removal, etc.).  
Bolt size  
Wheel lug nut torque*  
lb. ft.  
100  
Nm  
M12 x 1.5  
135  
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and  
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.  
255  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any  
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting  
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or  
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that  
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with  
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct  
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the  
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in  
motion, resulting in loss of control.  
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole  
prior to installation. If there is  
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,  
remove loose particles by wiping  
with clean rag and apply grease.  
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot  
hole surface by smearing a “dime”  
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease  
around the wheel pilot surface (1)  
with end of finger. DO NOT apply  
grease to lugnut/stud holes or  
wheel-to-brake surfaces.  
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL  
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable  
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable  
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the  
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into  
the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must  
use the included funnel in such circumstances.  
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers  
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could  
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto  
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in  
serious personal injury.  
256  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
JUMP STARTING  
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if  
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could  
result in injury or vehicle damage.  
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,  
eyes and clothing, if contacted.  
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission  
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start  
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic  
transmission may cause transmission damage.  
Preparing your vehicle  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the  
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the  
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is  
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the  
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update  
transmission operation.  
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.  
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could  
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.  
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle  
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on  
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving  
parts.  
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before  
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.  
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical  
surges. Turn all other accessories off.  
257  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
Connecting the jumper cables  
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the assisting battery.  
258  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the  
assisting battery.  
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed  
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the  
carburetor/fuel injection system.  
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker  
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding  
points.  
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the  
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may  
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.  
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of  
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.  
259  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Jump starting  
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at  
moderately increased speed.  
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.  
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an  
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.  
Removing the jumper cables  
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were  
connected.  
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
260  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster  
vehicle’s battery.  
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
disabled vehicle’s battery.  
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables  
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can  
relearn its idle conditions.  
261  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WRECKER TOWING  
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing  
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your  
roadside assistance service provider.  
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed  
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not  
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.  
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle  
damage may occur.  
If your vehicle is to be towed using wheel lift equipment, the non-lifted  
wheels must be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the vehicle.  
Place a rag on top of the hoist cable below the fascia when loading or  
unloading a vehicle on a flatbed wrecker to prevent surface damage to  
the fascia.  
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow  
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for  
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.  
262  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Emergencies  
Emergency towing  
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access  
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your  
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat  
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:  
Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward  
direction.  
Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock  
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the  
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).  
Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).  
Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).  
263  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED  
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized  
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling  
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you  
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your  
continued satisfaction.  
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or  
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all  
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair  
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.  
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your  
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or  
Motorcraftparts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized  
by Ford.  
Away from home  
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the  
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed  
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.  
In the United States:  
Mailing address  
Ford Motor Company  
Customer Relationship Center  
P.O. Box 6248  
Dearborn, MI 48121  
Telephone  
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)  
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)  
Online  
Additional information and resources are available online at  
www.genuineservice.com.  
U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code  
Owner Guides  
Maintenance Schedules  
Recalls  
Ford Extended Service Plans  
Ford Genuine Accessories  
Service specials and promotions.  
264  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Assistance  
In Canada:  
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)  
Customer Relationship Centre  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited  
P.O. Box 2000  
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4  
Telephone  
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)  
Online  
www.ford.ca  
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)  
Lincoln Centre  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited  
P.O. Box 2000  
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4  
Telephone  
1-800-387-9333  
Online  
www.lincolncanada.com  
Additional assistance  
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you  
are receiving, follow these steps:  
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your  
selling/servicing authorized dealer.  
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales  
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.  
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company  
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center  
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following  
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Your telephone number (home and business)  
The name of the authorized dealer and city where located  
The vehicle’s current odometer reading  
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing  
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final  
repair attempt in some states.  
265  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB  
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty  
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement  
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute  
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights  
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty  
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.  
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)  
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer  
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the  
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of  
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the  
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and  
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or  
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer  
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund  
or replacement vehicle.  
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer  
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its  
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership  
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs  
first:  
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity  
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR  
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a  
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of  
the vehicle) OR  
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of  
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)  
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the  
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the  
following address:  
Ford Motor Company  
16800 Executive Plaza Drive  
Mail Drop 3NE-B  
Dearborn, MI 48126  
266  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM  
(U.S. ONLY)  
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.  
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step  
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,  
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.  
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and  
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact  
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of  
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your  
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An  
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case  
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will  
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.  
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the  
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as  
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually  
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.  
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,  
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked  
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,  
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have  
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be  
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB  
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the  
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.  
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at  
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:  
BBB AUTO LINE  
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800  
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833  
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford  
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.  
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility  
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time  
without notice and without obligation.  
267  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM  
(CANADA ONLY)  
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases  
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the  
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern  
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial  
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy  
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a  
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is  
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal  
proceedings.  
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct  
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal  
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the  
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve  
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s  
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.  
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more  
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial  
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.  
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA  
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the  
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you  
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.  
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock  
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional  
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.  
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may  
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause  
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of  
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper  
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle  
back into the U.S.  
268  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Assistance  
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in  
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest  
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:  
FORD MOTOR COMPANY  
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS  
1555 Fairlane Drive  
Fairlane Business Park #3  
Allen Park, Michigan 48101  
U.S.A.  
Telephone: (313) 594-4857  
FAX: (313) 390-0804  
Email: expcac@ford.com  
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized  
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can  
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.  
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of  
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and  
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.  
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.  
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE  
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:  
HELM, INCORPORATED  
P.O. Box 07150  
Detroit, Michigan 48207  
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356  
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST  
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:  
www.helminc.com.  
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or  
money order.)  
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide  
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or  
by writing to:  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited  
Service Publications CHQ202  
The Canadian Road  
P.O. Box 2000  
Oakville, ON, Canada  
L6J 5E4  
269  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Assistance  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has  
a defect which could cause a crash  
or could cause injury or death, you  
should immediately inform the  
National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and  
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a  
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor  
Company.  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at  
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;  
or write to:  
Administrator  
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or  
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport  
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.  
270  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning  
WASHING THE EXTERIOR  
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral  
pH shampoo, such as MotorcraftDetail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is  
available from your authorized dealer.  
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing  
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted  
surfaces.  
Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to  
strong, direct sunlight.  
Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for  
best results.  
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to  
eliminate water spotting.  
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the  
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause  
damage to the vehicle.  
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings  
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
paintwork and trim over time. Use MotorcraftBug and Tar Remover  
(ZC-42) which is available from your authorized dealer.  
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a  
car wash.  
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted  
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,  
wash off as soon as possible.  
Exterior chrome  
Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH  
shampoo, such as MotorcraftDetail Wash (ZC-3-A).  
Use MotorcraftCustom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from  
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to  
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a  
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.  
Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads  
as they can scratch the chrome surface.  
After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft௡  
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,  
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental  
effects.  
271  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning  
WAXING  
Wash the vehicle first.  
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use MotorcraftPremium  
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,  
or an equivalent quality product.  
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body  
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof  
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl  
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.  
PAINT CHIPS  
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.  
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to  
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.  
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar  
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.  
Always read the instructions before using the products.  
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS  
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint  
finish. In order to maintain their shine:  
Clean weekly with MotorcraftWheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),  
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake  
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse  
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.  
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or  
covers.  
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your  
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning  
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust  
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.  
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel  
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.  
To remove tar and grease, use MotorcraftBug and Tar Remover  
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.  
272  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning  
ENGINE  
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt  
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:  
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The  
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause  
damage.  
Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the  
engine block or other engine components.  
Spray MotorcraftEngine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all  
parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use  
MotorcraftEngine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).  
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning  
the engine.  
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the  
running engine may cause internal damage.  
Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug  
well, or the area in and around these locations.  
2.5L ENGINE  
273  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning  
3.0L ENGINE  
3.5L ENGINE  
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS  
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are  
available from your authorized dealer.  
For routine cleaning, use MotorcraftDetail Wash (ZC-3-A).  
If tar or grease spots are present, use MotorcraftBug and Tar  
Remover (ZC-42).  
274  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning  
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES  
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be  
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the  
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include  
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent  
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants  
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and  
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:  
The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with  
a non-abrasive cleaner such as MotorcraftUltra-Clear Spray Glass  
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.  
The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or  
MotorcraftPremium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),  
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains  
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot  
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car  
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear  
worn or do not function properly.  
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.  
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.  
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner  
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer  
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft  
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After  
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The  
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield  
with water.  
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the  
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause  
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS  
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a  
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton  
cloth to dry these areas.  
Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion  
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the  
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.  
275  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning  
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in  
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan  
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted  
surfaces.  
Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the  
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.  
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents  
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid  
contamination of the airbag system.  
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument  
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:  
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.  
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more  
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot  
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a  
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive  
interiors.  
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product  
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled  
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.  
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to  
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.  
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.  
INTERIOR  
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side  
airbags:  
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Remove light stains and soil with MotorcraftProfessional Strength  
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).  
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first  
with MotorcraftSpot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use  
MotorcraftMulti-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).  
If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area  
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.  
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can  
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of  
the seat materials.  
276  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning  
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the  
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt  
webbing.  
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do  
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products  
could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of  
the side airbag in a collision.  
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the  
leather.  
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For  
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water  
solution. In Canada, use MotorcraftVinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the  
area with a soft cloth.  
If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and  
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially  
available cleaning product designed for automotive leather.  
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or  
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based  
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of  
the clear, protective coating.  
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet  
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the  
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.  
UNDERBODY  
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and  
door drain holes free from packed dirt.  
277  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS  
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality  
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These  
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your  
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style  
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality  
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use  
the following products or products of equivalent quality:  
MotorcraftBug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)  
MotorcraftCustom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)  
MotorcraftCustom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)  
MotorcraftDetail Wash (ZC-3-A)  
MotorcraftDusting Cloth (ZC-24)  
MotorcraftEngine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)  
MotorcraftEngine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)  
MotorcraftMulti-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)  
MotorcraftPremium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)  
MotorcraftPremium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)  
MotorcraftPremium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)  
(ZC-32-A)  
MotorcraftProfessional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)  
MotorcraftSpot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)  
MotorcraftTire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)  
MotorcraftUltra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)  
MotorcraftVinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)  
MotorcraftWheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)  
278  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS  
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance  
information which makes tracking routine service easy.  
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can  
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty  
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and  
services are covered.  
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts  
conforming to specifications. Motorcraftparts are designed and built to  
provide the best performance in your vehicle.  
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE  
Do not work on a hot engine.  
Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.  
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed  
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.  
Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)  
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.  
Working with the engine off  
Automatic transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
Manual transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal, place the  
gearshift in 1 (First), and release the clutch pedal.  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
279  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Working with the engine on  
Automatic transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Block the wheels.  
Manual transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal, place the  
gearshift in N (Neutral), and release the clutch pedal.  
2. Block the wheels.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.  
OPENING THE HOOD  
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood  
release handle located under the  
bottom of the instrument panel near  
the steering column.  
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and  
release the auxiliary latch that is  
located under the front center of  
the hood.  
3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.  
280  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
2.5L I4 engine  
1. Engine coolant reservoir  
2. Engine oil filler cap  
3. Engine oil dipstick  
4. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir  
5. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission only)  
6. Battery  
7. Power distribution box  
8. Air filter assembly  
9. Coolant bleed valve  
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
281  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.0L V6 engine  
1. Engine coolant reservoir  
2. Brake fluid reservoir  
3. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission only)  
4. Battery  
5. Power distribution box  
6. Air filter assembly  
7. Coolant bleed valve  
8. Engine oil dipstick  
9. Engine oil filler cap  
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
282  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.5L V6 engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir  
2. Transmission fluid dipstick  
3. Brake fluid reservoir  
4. Battery  
5. Power distribution box  
6. Air filter assembly  
7. Engine oil dipstick  
8. Engine oil filler cap  
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
10. Engine coolant reservoir  
283  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID  
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the  
level is low. In very cold weather, do  
not fill the reservoir completely.  
Only use a washer fluid that meets  
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.  
Do not use any special washer fluid  
such as windshield water repellent  
type fluid or bug wash. They may  
cause squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing. Refer to  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.  
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the  
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.  
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used  
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the  
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.  
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below  
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure  
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could  
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or  
accident.  
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer  
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system  
components.  
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES  
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the  
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle  
from the wiper arm. Press the lock  
tab to release the blade and pull the  
wiper blade down toward the  
windshield to remove it from the  
arm.  
2. Attach the new wiper to the  
wiper arm and press it into place  
until a click is heard.  
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.  
284  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the  
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning  
chapter.  
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to  
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The  
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the  
wiper rubber element.  
ENGINE OIL  
Checking the engine oil  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate  
intervals for checking the engine oil.  
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.  
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the  
oil pan.  
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P  
(Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions).  
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.  
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.  
2.5L I4 engine  
285  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.0L V6 engine  
3.5L V6 engine  
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.  
286  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
On the 2.5L I4 engine, be sure the  
notch in the dipstick flange is  
aligned with the V on the engine  
when reinserting it.  
2.5L I4 engine  
3.0L/3.5L V6 engines  
If the oil level is within this range, the oil level is acceptable. DO  
NOT ADD OIL.  
2.5L I4 engine  
3.0L/3.5L V6 engines  
If the oil level is below this mark, engine oil must be added to raise  
the level within the normal operating range.  
287  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2.5L I4 engine  
3.0L V6 engine  
3.5L V6 engine  
If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil in  
this chapter.  
288  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2.5L I4 engine  
3.0L/3.5L V6 engines  
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Oil levels above this mark  
may cause engine damage. If the engine is overfilled, some oil must be  
removed from the engine by an authorized dealer.  
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.  
On the 2.5L I4 engine, be sure the  
notch in the dipstick flange is  
aligned with the V on the engine  
when it is reinserted.  
Adding engine oil  
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine  
oil in this chapter.  
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add  
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the  
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the  
opening.  
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the  
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.  
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.  
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise  
until it stops.  
289  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the  
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.  
Engine oil and filter recommendations  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms  
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel  
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and  
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
automobile manufacturers.  
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use MotorcraftSAE  
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification  
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and  
durability performance meeting all requirements for your  
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and  
capacities later in this chapter for more information.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that  
is not covered by Ford warranty.  
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule  
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.  
Ford production and Motorcraftreplacement oil filters are designed for  
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used  
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up  
engine noises or knock may be experienced.  
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraftoil filter or  
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.  
290  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
BATTERY  
Your vehicle is equipped with a  
Motorcraftmaintenance-free  
battery which normally does not  
require additional water during its  
life of service.  
If your battery has a  
cover/shield, make sure it is  
reinstalled after the battery has  
been cleaned or replaced.  
For longer, trouble-free operation,  
keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery  
cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.  
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables  
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the  
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.  
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be  
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an  
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery  
during storage.  
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to  
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect  
battery performance and durability.  
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which  
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks  
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the  
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide  
proper ventilation.  
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive  
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the  
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or  
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on  
opposite corners.  
291  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries  
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.  
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against  
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or  
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and  
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician  
immediately.  
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories  
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.  
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,  
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When  
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must  
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and  
performance. To begin this process:  
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.  
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral  
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the  
engine.  
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.  
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.  
The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to  
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.  
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle  
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle  
trim is eventually relearned.  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the  
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the  
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and  
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the  
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its  
optimum shift feel.  
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,  
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is  
reconnected.  
292  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Always dispose of automotive  
batteries in a responsible manner.  
Follow your local authorized  
standards for disposal. Call your  
local authorized recycling center  
to find out more about recycling  
automotive batteries.  
RECYCLE  
ENGINE COOLANT  
Checking engine coolant  
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the  
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant  
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,  
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration  
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of  
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the  
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add  
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.  
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water  
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above  
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A  
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:  
Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).  
Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.  
Proper function of calibrated gauges.  
293  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
When the engine is cold, check the  
level of the engine coolant in the  
reservoir.  
COLD FILL RANGE  
The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the  
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir  
(depending upon application).  
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval  
schedules.  
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your  
vehicle in this chapter.  
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,  
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is  
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding  
engine coolant in this chapter.  
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine  
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified  
function and vehicle location.  
Adding engine coolant  
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant  
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the  
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.  
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.  
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system  
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts.  
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer  
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant  
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.  
294  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Do not mix coolants. Add the coolant type originally equipped  
in your vehicle. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and  
capacities in this chapter.  
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives  
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.  
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.  
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case  
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the  
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of  
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone  
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,  
overheating or freezing.  
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants  
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol  
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or  
freezing.  
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These  
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine  
coolant.  
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap  
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery  
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and  
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a  
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to  
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with  
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the  
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.  
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come  
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.  
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by  
following these steps:  
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.  
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant  
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).  
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.  
3. Step back while the pressure releases.  
295  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the  
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.  
2.5L coolant bleed valve  
3.0L coolant bleed valve  
5. Open the coolant bleed valve on the back of the engine water outlet  
for the 2.5L engine or in the thermostat housing for the 3.0L engine.  
6. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to  
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.  
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator  
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.  
7. Close the bleed valve and reinstall the cap on the coolant reservoir.  
Turn the cap until it is tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.  
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer  
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50  
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the  
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50  
coolant concentration.  
296  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant  
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If  
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and  
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.  
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per  
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.  
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low  
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine  
damage.  
Recycled engine coolant  
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine  
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.  
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate  
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling  
and disposing of automotive fluids.  
Coolant refill capacity  
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer  
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.  
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant  
in this section.  
Severe climates  
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):  
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration  
above 50%.  
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will  
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the  
winter months.  
If you drive in extremely hot climates:  
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration  
above 40%.  
297  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.  
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50  
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system  
and engine protection.  
What you should know about fail-safe cooling  
(2.5L I4 and 3.5L V6 engines only)  
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to  
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.  
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load  
and terrain.  
How fail-safe cooling works  
If the engine begins to overheat:  
The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H (hot) area.  
The  
symbol will illuminate.  
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine  
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled  
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.  
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:  
The engine power will be limited.  
The air conditioning system will be disabled.  
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine  
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to  
increase.  
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take  
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize  
engine damage.  
298  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
When fail-safe mode is activated  
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the  
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed  
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is  
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine  
damage, therefore:  
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.  
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.  
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.  
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.  
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the  
engine is running or hot.  
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.  
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem  
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an  
authorized dealer as soon as possible.  
FUEL FILTER  
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with  
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.  
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS  
Important safety precautions  
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an  
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear  
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”  
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may  
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.  
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death  
if misused or mishandled.  
299  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,  
which is a cancer-causing agent.  
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:  
Extinguish all smoking materials  
and any open flames before  
fueling your vehicle.  
Always turn off the vehicle before  
fueling.  
Automotive fuels can be harmful  
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly  
toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is  
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are  
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for  
hours.  
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind  
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,  
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious  
illness and permanent injury.  
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,  
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and  
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could  
lead to permanent injury.  
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated  
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or  
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.  
Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of  
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or  
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In  
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If  
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap  
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an  
adverse reaction.  
FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol. Any fuel  
blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as  
“Fuel Ethanol.” Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel placed over the  
fuel fill inlet.  
300  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer  
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn  
and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a small  
amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. The  
resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is  
denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.  
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%  
denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol  
has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline  
and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.  
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up  
to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold  
weather may require additional measures for reliable starting.  
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals  
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or  
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special  
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles  
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.  
WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded  
gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle  
is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures,  
damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.  
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and  
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never  
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain  
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.  
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can  
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is  
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.  
301  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Refueling  
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause  
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:  
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;  
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;  
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;  
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;  
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended  
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;  
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump  
fuel.  
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when  
filling an ungrounded fuel container:  
Place approved fuel container on the ground.  
DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the  
cargo area).  
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while  
filling.  
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill  
position.  
Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system  
Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler  
system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the  
fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is  
self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.  
When fueling your vehicle:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
2. Open the fuel filler door.  
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system. Pump fuel  
as normal.  
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler  
nozzle—allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the  
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank  
and not spill onto the vehicle.  
302  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do  
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel  
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below  
and in front of the fuel filler door.  
If the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message  
comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may  
have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing.  
At the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine,  
open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill  
opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see  
Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided  
with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the  
inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the check fuel  
fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset  
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet  
lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off. A driving cycle  
consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine  
off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the check  
fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause  
the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear  
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”  
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may  
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.  
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel fill inlet  
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel placed over  
the fuel fill inlet.  
303  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Choosing the right fuel  
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED  
FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85).  
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only use  
UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10%  
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded fuel or  
any other fuel.  
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your  
vehicle.  
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic  
compounds, including manganese-based additives.  
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause  
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not  
be covered under warranty.  
Octane recommendations  
Your vehicle is designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a  
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.  
87  
Some stations offer fuels posted as  
(R+M)/2 METHOD  
“Regular” with an octane rating  
below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels  
below 87 are not recommended.  
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if  
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel  
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to  
prevent any engine damage.  
FFV engine (if equipped)  
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol  
(Ed75–Ed85), “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two  
fuels.  
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain  
damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your warranty may be  
invalidated.  
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do  
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as  
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)  
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling  
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in  
ethanol concentration.  
304  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, you  
should follow a different maintenance schedule. In addition to this, if you  
exclusively use E85 fuel, it is also recommended to fill the fuel tank with  
regular unleaded gasoline once every 3,000 miles (4,800 km). See  
scheduled maintenance information for more information.  
Fuel quality  
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability  
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. If the problems  
persist, see your authorized dealer.  
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It  
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel  
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane  
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and  
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of  
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your  
warranty.  
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter  
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved  
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.  
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when  
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the  
World-Wide Fuel Charter.  
FFV engine (if equipped)  
Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel around the fuel fill inlet.  
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do  
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as  
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)  
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling  
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in  
ethanol concentration.  
If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, you  
should follow a different maintenance schedule. In addition to this, it is  
also recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline  
once every 3,000 miles (4,800 km). See scheduled maintenance  
information for more information.  
Cleaner air  
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to  
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right  
fuel section.  
305  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Running out of fuel  
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse  
effect on powertrain components.  
If you have run out of fuel:  
You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after  
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to  
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer  
than normal.  
Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the  
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than  
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.  
The service engine soon  
indicator may come on. For more  
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning  
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
Refilling with a portable fuel container  
With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions  
when filling from a portable fuel container:  
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers  
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could  
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto  
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious  
personal injury.  
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy  
Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel  
system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.  
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the  
included funnel.  
306  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
1. Locate the white plastic funnel. It  
is attached to the underside of the  
spare tire cover or is included with  
the tire changing tools.  
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel™ system.  
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.  
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels  
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose  
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with  
the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included funnel has  
been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.  
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY  
Measuring techniques  
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the  
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as  
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are  
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend  
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles  
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more  
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000  
km).  
Filling the tank  
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to  
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance  
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.  
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the  
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the  
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates  
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel  
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.  
307  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should  
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your  
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be  
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the  
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.  
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:  
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,  
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.  
Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time  
the tank is filled.  
Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.  
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.  
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.  
Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the  
same direction each time you fill up.  
Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.  
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.  
Calculating fuel economy  
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading  
(in miles or kilometers).  
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in  
gallons or liters).  
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record  
the current odometer reading.  
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer  
reading.  
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel  
economy:  
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.  
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total  
kilometers traveled.  
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city  
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel  
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records  
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel  
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.  
308  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits  
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change  
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.  
Habits  
Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.  
Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel  
economy.  
Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste  
fuel.  
Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.  
Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.  
Slow down gradually.  
Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%  
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).  
Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.  
Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.  
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if  
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary  
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.  
Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel  
economy.  
Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.  
Maintenance  
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.  
Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel  
economy.  
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product  
specifications and capacities in this chapter.  
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the  
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks  
found in scheduled maintenance information.  
309  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Conditions  
Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.  
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately  
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).  
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example; bug  
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.  
Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first  
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.  
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to  
driving on hilly terrain.  
Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top  
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.  
Close windows for high speed driving.  
EPA fuel economy estimates  
Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the  
Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact  
your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your  
vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the  
fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may  
vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a  
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with  
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic  
converter and other emission control components continue to work  
properly:  
Use only the specified fuel listed.  
Avoid running out of fuel.  
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at  
high speeds.  
Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information  
performed according to the specified schedule.  
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance  
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle  
and to its emissions system.  
310  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
If other than Ford, Motorcraftor Ford-authorized parts are used for  
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting  
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine  
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Illumination of the service engine soon  
indicator, charging system  
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,  
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control  
system is not working properly.  
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust  
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust  
system inspected and repaired immediately.  
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and  
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.  
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By  
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,  
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not  
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent  
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on  
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the  
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.  
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for  
complete emission warranty information.  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s  
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the  
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet  
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your  
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service  
engine soon  
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine  
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:  
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected  
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.  
311  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run  
poorly.  
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel™  
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.  
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.  
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank  
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the  
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any  
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon  
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving  
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway  
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.  
If the service engine soon  
indicator remains on, have your vehicle  
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions  
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,  
continued driving with the service engine soon  
indicator on can  
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and  
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.  
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing  
Some state/provincial and local governments may have  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent  
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M  
test if the service engine soon  
indicator is on or not working  
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined  
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly  
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.  
If the service engine soon  
indicator is on or the bulb does not  
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board  
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.  
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the  
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may  
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the  
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position  
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine  
soon  
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not  
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon  
indicator stays on  
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.  
312  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system  
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the  
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting  
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:  
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by  
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle  
periods.  
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the  
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The  
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,  
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If  
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will  
have to be repeated.  
POWER STEERING FLUID  
Refer to scheduled maintenance information.  
3.5L V6 engine only  
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating  
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be  
near the center of the normal area between H and C).  
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several  
times.  
3. Turn the engine off.  
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the  
MIN/MAX or upper and lower lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this  
range.  
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking  
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN/MAX or upper and  
lower lines. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for  
the proper fluid type.  
313  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID  
Brake and clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.  
2.5L engine  
MAX  
MIN  
3.0L/3.5L engines  
The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the  
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX  
lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add  
fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the  
performance of the system could be compromised; seek service from  
your authorized dealer immediately.  
TRANSMISSION FLUID  
Checking 6–speed automatic transmission fluid (AWS21)  
(if equipped)  
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled  
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not  
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the  
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or  
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.  
314  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Checking automatic transmission fluid at normal operating  
temperature (140°F-158°F [60°C-70°C])  
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an  
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up  
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]) until the engine coolant gauge  
indicates normal operating temperature. If your vehicle has been  
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic  
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be  
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before  
checking.  
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until the coolant gauge indicates  
normal operating temperature.  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.  
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,  
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear  
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage (approximately  
10–15 seconds in each position).  
4. Move the gearshift lever to P (Park) and leave the engine running.  
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry, lint-free rag. If  
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment  
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.  
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.  
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect  
the fluid level. The fluid should read  
within the hot range on the dipstick  
if at normal operating temperature  
(140°F-158°F [60°C-70°C]).  
Checking automatic transmission fluid at cool temperature  
(59°F-77°F [15°C-25°C])  
If a fluid check is necessary at a low  
fluid temperature (59°F-77°F  
[15°C-25°C]), perform the check  
using the cold range on the dipstick.  
However, the fluid must be  
re-checked at the proper fluid temperature.  
315  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Low fluid level  
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid  
level does not show at all on the  
dipstick.  
Driving the vehicle with less than  
the recommended fluid level may result in transmission failure. An under  
fill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement  
concerns and/or possible damage to the transmission.  
High fluid level  
Fluid levels above the normal  
operating range may result in  
transmission failure. An overfill  
condition of transmission fluid may  
cause shift and/or engagement  
concerns and/or possible damage to  
the transmission.  
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.  
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels  
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of  
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this  
chapter.  
Note: Only one ATF fluid specification has been tested and approved for  
use with the automatic 6-speed: Premium Automatic Transmission fluid.  
Mercon fluids cannot be used with the automatic 6-speed without  
damage or voiding warranty.  
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause  
internal transmission component damage.  
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler  
tube until the level is correct.  
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized  
dealer.  
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or  
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.  
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or  
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission  
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.  
316  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Checking automatic transmission fluid (6F35) (if equipped)  
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled  
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not  
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the  
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or  
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.  
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an  
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up  
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been  
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic  
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be  
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before  
checking.  
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating  
temperature.  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.  
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,  
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear  
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.  
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.  
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If  
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment  
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.  
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.  
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in  
the operating range for normal operating temperature.  
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following dipsticks.  
317  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Low fluid level  
Type A  
Type B  
DO NOT ADD  
ADD (CHECK HOT)  
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick  
and the outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C).  
Correct fluid level  
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating  
temperatures 185°F-200°F (85°C-93°C) on a level surface. The normal  
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles  
(30 km) of driving.  
Type A  
Type B  
DO NOT ADD  
ADD (CHECK HOT)  
The transmission fluid should be in the zone, identified by the arrows in  
the above figures, if at normal operating temperature 185°F-200°F  
(85°C-93°C).  
318  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
High fluid level  
Type A  
Type B  
DO NOT ADD  
ADD (CHECK HOT)  
Fluid levels above the zone, identified by the arrows in the above figures,  
may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission  
fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible  
damage.  
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.  
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels  
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of  
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick blade. Refer to  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.  
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause  
internal transmission component damage.  
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler  
tube until the level is correct.  
Type A  
Type B  
DO NOT ADD  
ADD (CHECK HOT)  
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized  
dealer.  
319  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or  
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.  
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or  
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission  
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.  
Checking transmission fluid level for recreational flat tow  
operation  
Type A  
Type B  
DO NOT ADD  
ADD (CHECK HOT)  
Before recreational flat towing your vehicle, the transmission fluid level  
may need to be set to a lower level. These guidelines are designed to  
prevent damage to your transmission. Before you recreational flat tow,  
your fluid level must be verified by an authorized dealer.  
This fluid level is within the normal operating fluid range and does not  
require that you have your fluid level readjusted after recreational flat  
tow operation.  
See the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information on  
recreational flat towing.  
320  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)  
1. Park the vehicle on a level  
surface.  
2. Engage the parking brake fully –  
put in first gear.  
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.  
4. Clean the filler plug.  
5. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
6. Fluid level should be at bottom of  
the opening.  
7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is  
within 3/8 inch (10mm) of the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle  
on a level surface.  
8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Maintenance  
product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.  
AIR FILTER  
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate  
intervals for changing the air filter element.  
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element  
listed. Refer to Motorcraftpart numbers in this chapter.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.  
321  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Changing the air filter element  
2.5L I4 engine  
3.0L V6 engine  
3.5L V6 engine  
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.  
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.  
322  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2.5L I4 engine  
3.0L V6 engine  
3.5L V6 engine  
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.  
323  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or  
debris and to ensure good sealing.  
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter  
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause  
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly  
seated.  
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps. Be sure  
that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air  
cleaner housing.  
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe  
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to  
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.  
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS  
Component  
2.5L I4  
engine  
FA-1785  
3.0L V6 engine  
3.5L V6 engine  
Air filter  
element  
FA-1786  
FA-1884  
Battery  
Oil filter  
Spark plugs  
BXT-96-R  
BXT-96-R  
FL-500-S  
BXT-96-R  
FL-500-S  
FL-910  
1
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to  
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for  
changing the spark plugs.  
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and  
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraftor  
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be  
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not  
used.  
324  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
325  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
326  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
327  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
328  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
ENGINE DATA  
Engine  
2.5L I4 engine 3.0L V6 engine 3.5L V6 engine  
Cubic inches  
Required fuel  
Firing order  
151  
87 octane  
1-3-4-2  
182  
214  
87 octane  
1-4-2-5-3-6  
Coil on plug  
87 octane  
1-4-2-5-3-6  
Coil on plug  
Ignition system Coil on plug  
0.049–0.053 inch 0.045–0.049 inch 0.052–0.056 inch  
(1.25–1.35 mm) (1.15–1.25 mm) (1.32–1.42 mm)  
Spark plug gap  
Compression  
ratio  
9.7:1  
10.3:1  
10.3:1  
Engine drivebelt routing  
2.5L I4 Engine  
3.0L V6 Engine  
329  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
3.5L V6 Engine  
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine.  
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.  
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE  
Safety Compliance Certification Label  
The National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration Regulations require  
that a Safety Compliance  
Certification Label be affixed to a  
vehicle and prescribe where the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label may be located. The Safety  
Compliance Certification Label is  
located on the structure (B-Pillar)  
by the trailing edge of the driver’s  
door or the edge of the driver’s  
door.  
330  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
The vehicle identification number is  
located on the driver side  
instrument panel.  
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Please note that in the graphic,  
XXXX is representative of your  
vehicle identification number.  
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following  
information:  
1. World manufacturer identifier  
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint  
Devices and their location  
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body  
type  
4. Engine type  
5. Check digit  
6. Model year  
7. Assembly plant  
8. Production sequence number  
331  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Specifications  
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS  
You can find a transmission code on  
the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label. The following table tells you  
which transmission each code  
represents.  
Description  
Code  
6–Speed Manual Transmission (G6M)  
6–Speed Automatic Transmission (6F35)  
6–Speed Automatic Transmission (Aisin F21)  
6
W
B
332  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE  
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your  
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality  
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive  
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and  
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is  
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous  
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or  
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to  
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the  
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective  
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides  
you the greatest benefit:  
12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or  
the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.  
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.  
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all  
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the  
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer  
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com.  
Exterior style  
Bug shields  
Deflectors  
Exterior trim kits  
Splash guards  
Interior style  
All weather floor mats  
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors  
Premium carpeted floor mats  
Lifestyle  
Ash cup / smoker’s package  
Cargo organization and management  
333  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessories  
Peace of mind  
Remote start  
Vehicle security systems  
Wheel locks  
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in  
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:  
When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your  
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of  
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety  
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for  
specific weight information.  
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio  
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile  
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and  
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such  
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC  
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service  
technician.  
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your  
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive  
use.  
To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock  
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas  
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in  
the area of the driver’s side hood.  
Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to  
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect  
battery performance and durability.  
334  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ford Extended Service Plan  
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS  
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered  
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan  
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”  
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.  
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components  
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels  
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.  
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500  
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only  
discuss what’s not covered!  
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech  
items.  
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.  
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.  
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in  
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and  
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:  
Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.  
Factory-trained technicians.  
Genuine Ford and MotorcraftParts.  
Rental car reimbursement  
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are  
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty  
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.  
Transferable coverage  
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can  
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re  
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a  
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!  
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:  
Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.  
Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.  
Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.  
Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and  
emergency transportation.  
335  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ford Extended Service Plan  
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself  
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the  
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize  
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.  
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!  
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that  
routinely wear out.  
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording  
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine  
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require  
periodic attention for normal “wear”:  
Wiper blades  
Spark plugs (except  
California)  
Clutch disc  
Brake pads and linings  
Shock absorbers  
Belts and hoses  
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they  
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving  
lifestyle and budget.  
Interest free finance options available  
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down  
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment  
opportunity.  
336  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ford Extended Service Plan  
337  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
Automatic transmission  
Air conditioning  
Axle  
B
Audio system  
C
338  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Cleaning your vehicle  
D
Defrost  
Clutch  
Dipstick  
Controls  
E
Coolant  
Emergencies, roadside  
339  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
G
F
H
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles  
Heating  
340  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
I
Locks  
J
M
K
Keyless entry system  
L
341  
Lamps  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
N
O
S
P
R
342  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Steering  
Steering wheel  
Stereo  
U
T
V
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS)  
W
Windows  
343  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
344  
2010 Fusion (fsn)  
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing  
USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Elation Professional Landscape Lighting ELAR 180 PRO RGBAW User Manual
Extron electronic Switch SW2 VGA ARS User Manual
Fisher Price Crib K2564 User Manual
Fisher Price Fitness Equipment K9125 User Manual
Fisher Price High Chair V3393 User Manual
Focal Car Speaker 130 A1 User Manual
Frigidaire Air Conditioner FRA123CT1 User Manual
Frigidaire Cookware FPES3085K F User Manual
Fujitsu Printer DL9300 User Manual
Fujitsu Speaker System TD508II User Manual